You are on page 1of 369

I

I
Publication No.: 23,735
FRIEDEWALD, Russell Edward
A FORMAL AND STYLISTIC ANALYSIS OF THE
PUBLISHED MUSIC OF SAMUEL BARBER.
Iowa State University, Ph.D., 1957

Xerox University Microfilms, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48106

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
A FORMAL AND STYLISTIC ANALYSIS

OF THE PUBLISHED MUSIC OF

SAMUEL BARBER

by
Russell Edward Frledewald

A dissertation submitted in partial fulfillment of


the requirements for the degree of Doctor of
Philosophy in the Department of Music
in the Graduate College of the
State University of Iowa

Chairman: Professor Thomas S. Turner

August 1957

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
TABLE OP CONTENTS

page

Preface ................................................. v

Chapter

I Music for Solo Voice with Accompaniment ........ 1

'Introduction ................................ 1

Opus 2 ...................................... 3
No. 1 "The D a i s i e s " ..................... 4
No. 2 "With Rue My Heart is Laden". . . . 3
No. 3 "Bessie Bobtail" ................ 8

Opus 3 12
Dover B e a c h ............................... 12

Opus 1 0 ......................................... 19
No. 1 "Rain has F a l l e n " ................... 20
No. 2 "Sleep N o w " ......................... 26
No. 3 "I Hear an A r r a y " ................... 30

Opus 13 ................... 36
No. 1 "A Nun Takes the V e i l " ............. 37
No. 2 "The Secrets of the O l d " ........... 39
No. 3 "Sure on This Shining Night" ... 41
No. 4 "Nocturne"........................... 45

Opus 1 8 ................. 54
No. 1 "The Queen's Pace on the
Summery C o i n " ....................... 54
No. 2 "Monks and R a i s i n s " ................. 59

Opus 24 .. .....................................61
Knoxville; Summer of 1 9 1 5 .................6l

Opus 2 5 ................................ 69
N u v o l e t t a ................................. 69

ii

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Opus 27 ......................................... 73
Melodies p a s s a g e r e s ................... . 73
N o . 1 "Puisque tout p a s s e " .............75
No. 2 "Urx c y g n e " ....................... 76
No. 3 "Tombeau dans un p a r e " ........... 79
No. 4 "Le clocher c h a n t e " ............... 79
No. 5 " D e p a r t " ......................... 81

Opus 2 9 ...................... . ................ 83


Hermit Songs............................. 83
No. 1 "At Saint Patrick's Purgatory" . 84
No. 2 "Church Bell at N i g h t " ........... 86
No. 3 "St. Ita's V i s i o n " ...............87
No. 4 "The Heavenly B a n q u e t " ...........90
No. 5 "The Crucifixion"................. 92
No. 6 "Sea Snatch"....................... 93
No. 7 "Promiscuity" . . . . . 95
No. 8 "The Monk and His C a t " ........... 96
No. 9 "The Praises of God"............ 98
No.10 "The Desire for Hermitage" . . . 100

II The Choral M u s i c ................................105

Opus 8 ........................................ 105


No. 1 "The Virgin M a r t y r s " ............ 105
No. 2 "Let Down the Bars, 0Death" . . . 108

Opus 1 5 ......... ............................. 110


A Stopwatch and an OrdnanceM a p ......... 110

Opus 1 6 ........................................ 115


Reincarnations .......................... 115
No. 1 "Mary Haynes" ................... 115
No. 2 "Anthony 0 D a l y " ................. 118
No. 3 "The C o o l i n " ..................... 120

III The Piano Music......... 123

Excursions, Opus 2 0 ............................123


iS'o'n'ata for Plano, Opus 2 6 ...................... 132

iii

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
IV The Chamber M u s i c .................................156

Serenade for String Quartet or String


Orchestra, Opus 1 .............................156
Sonata for Violoncelloand Plano, Opus 6 . . . 166
String Quartet, Opus 1 1 ....................... 177

V The C o n c e r t o s ..................... 189

Concerto for Violin and Orchestra, Opus 14 . . 189


Capricorn Concerto, Opus 2 1 .............. 207
Concertofor Violoncello and Orchestra,
Opus 22 217

VI..............The S y m p h o n i e s . 240

First Symphony, Opus 9 .................... 240


Second~Symphony, Opus 19 . .................. 253

VII The Miscellaneous Orchestral Works ........... 273

Overture to The School for Scandal,Opus 5 . . 273


Music for a Scene from Shelley, Opus 7 . . . . 280
Essay for Orchestra',' Opus 12 ................ 286
SecondHSssay for Orchestra, Opus 1 7 ...... 297
Commando March"' T ...........................306
Ballet Suite Medea, Opus 2 3 ................ 311

VIII S u m m a r y .......................... 335

Appendix A: ChronologicalList of Published Works . . . 342

Appendix B: List ofR e c o r d s ............................. 345

Bibliography . ..................................... 350

iv

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
PREFACE

When this thesis was undertaken in March of 1955

the writer had hoped that Samuel Barber would permit and

encourage a personal interview about his life and work.

However, the following letter received from the composer

dated March 28 of that year destroyed all hope of immediate

or future contact:

'Capricorn' Mount Kisco, New York

March 28, 1955

Mr. Russell E. Friedewald


Music Department
State University of Iowa
Iowa City, Iowa

Dear Mr. Friedewald:

I am of course honored that you wish to devote


your thesis to me and my music but I must make
it very clear to you that at the present moment
I am up to my neck in work on a new opera and
simply will have no time at all to correspond
with you or to answer questions about my work.
I have just gone through this in some detail
for a book which Nathan Broder has written
about me, published by Schirmers, and do not
wish to give any more time to a similar pro
ject, that is - myself, for some years.

Very sincerely yours,

/s/ Samuel Barber

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
The concluding sentence of this letter serves to

corroborate the material presented in Nathan Broder's book,

Samuel Barber. 1 Because little or no additional information

can be gathered at this time, only a brief sketch outlining

the composer's career is included here; the information is

compiled from Broder's book.

Samuel Barber

Bom West Chester, Pennsylvania, March 9 1910

Charter student at the Curtis Institute of Music,


Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 1924

Instructors:

Piano: George Boyle, Isabelle Vengerova


Composition: Rosario Scalero
Voice: Emilio de Gogorza
Conducting: Fritz Reiner

B e a m s Prize awarded for violin sonata


(work remains unpublished) 1928

First trip abroad 1928

Left Curtis Institute 1933

Pulitzer Prize awarded for Sonata for Cello and


Piano, Op. 6 , and Music for a Scene 'from Shelley,
OpTT 1933
B e a m s Prize (second time) awarded for Overture
to the School for Scandal,Op. 5 ___ 1933

1. Nathan Broder, Samuel Barber (New York: G, Schirmer,


Inc., 1954).

vi

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Prix de Rome awarded for Sonata for Cello and Piano,
Op. 6 , and Music for a Scene from Shelley, Op. 7 1935

Prix de Rome (second time) awarded for Symphony in


One Movement, Op. 9 1936

Went to Italy 1936

Taught at the Curtis Institute 1939-42

Inducted into the Army 19^3

Released from the Army 1945

Settled in Mount Kisco, New York, his present


home 1945

Samuel Barber's music is frequently performed by

leading orchestras and artists, both in this country and

abroad, thus exerting a strong influence on contemporary

musical thought. While his position in the present day

musical scene is difficult to assess with any certainty,

indeed, it being questionable that such an assessment is

desirable, his serious approach to the art of music, his

prodigious technique, and his record of work and achievement

merit careful study; such a study is the primary purpose of

this thesis.

Because the composer is active at this time in

the practice of his art, no survey of his music can be

complete. For this reason this dissertation is limited to

the published music that was available up to the summer of

vii

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1955 .

The technical details of melody, counterpoint,

harmony, rhythm, and orchestration are Important factors to

he considered In any study of music. It Is the belief of

the writer, however, that an intimate and conscious under

standing of the design (or form, or structure) of the music

is even more important if one is to "extract from the art

as much as he can of that which so many great men have put


2
into it. . Because of this belief, it is felt that a

more meaningful discussion of Samuel Barber's music can be

achieved by placing the emphasis upon the structural design

and relating the technical details to it. Regardless of

the clarity of approach or the ingenious methods of

explanation that any writer might use, music must be heard

to be fully understood. Live performances of contemporary

American music are comparatively rare and one must depend

upon recordings to expand his knowledge. It is indeed

unfortunate that many recording companies discontinue

records when they cease to be profitable. While most of

Samuel Barber's published music has been recorded, several

2. Cedric Thorpe Davie, Musical Structure and Design


(London: Dennis Dobson, 1943), 10.

viii

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
works are no longer readily available.

No attempt has been made to invent new termi

nology, but a short explanation of seventh-chord identifi

cation may be necessary. The method of identification


v

presented by Dr. Allen Irvine McHose in his The Contrapuntal

Harmonic Technique of the 18th Century is consistently used.

Two factors are considered in the naming of seventh-chords:

first, the quality of the triad, and, second, the interval

between the root and the seventh. A major triad with the

addition of a minor seventh above the root is therefore

called a major-minor seventh chord; a diminished triad plus

a minor seventh is called a diminished-minor seventh chord,

etc. Whenever the triadic structure and the interval of a

seventh are identical, i.e., major triad and major seventh

above the root, the chord structure is simply referred to

as a major seventh chord.

All of Samuel Barber's music is published by

G. Schirmer, Inc. of New York City. In a letter dated

September 21, 1955 Mr. H. W. Heinsheimer, a representative

3. Allen Irvine McHose, The Contrapuntal Harmonic Technique


of the 18th Century (New York: P. S. Crofts & Company,
1^4777

ix

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
of that company, gave this writer permission to reproduce

short musical examples from Barber's works provided he

observe the following stipulations:

Just please observe the formality to add the


copyright notice which appears in the printed
copy to each of these quotes and state some
where in your forward that these quotes are
given by permission of the copyright owners,
G. Schirmer, Inc.
/s/ H. S. Helnsheimer

In compliance with the publisher's request, each musical

quotation is footnoted and the copyright notice given. The

following publishing companies have granted permission to

reproduce poems copyrighted by them: Yale University Press,

Harvard University Press, The Viking Press, Oxford University

Press, The Macmillan Company, Harper and Brothers Publishers,

and The Richards Press.

It is my pleasant duty to acknowledge the

indispensable help and advice I received from my many

friends and colleagues during the preparation of this

dissertation. I am especially grateful to Professor

Thomas S. Turner of the State University of Iowa for his

excellent guidance and valuable criticism, but most of all

for his enduring friendship and interest. I gratefully

acknowledge the gracious help of Professor Albert T. Luper

who gave abundantly of both his time and energy in my


x

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
behalf. To members of the State University of Iowa

Libraries, Michigan State University Libraries, The Library

of Congress, and to the New York Public Library sincere

thanks is tendered for easing the burden of tracing details

and shortening by many hours the task of compiling the in

formation found in the text. I am also indebted to my

friends and colleagues, Dr. H. Owen Reed, Paul Harder, Dr.

Stanley Finn, and Eunice Randall for their helpful comments

and suggestions.

Russell E. Friedewald

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1

Chapter 1

MUSIC FOR SOLO VOICE WITH ACCOMPANIMENT

Introduction

At the time of writing Samuel Barber has published

twenty-eight songs for solo voice with piano accompaniment.

Included among these are two song cycles, Melodies passageres,

and the Hermit Songs. There are five songs in the former

cycle and ten in the latter. Except for the songs included

in the two cycles, individual copies of each song are avail

able. At the present time there are two collections, one for

high voice, the other for low voice, which contain all the

songs by Samuel Barber published up to 1955.

In addition to the songs for solo voice with piano

accompaniment, there are two compositions for voice with in

strumental accompaniment. Dover Beach, Opus 3, is written

for solo voice and string quartet; Knoxville: Summer of 1915,

Opus 24, is scored for soprano voice and orchestra."''

That Samuel Barber understands the voice and its

limitations as do few contemporary composers is not at all

1. Several songs that were originally written for voice and


piano have been orchestrated by the composer (specific
citations will be made in subsequent footnotes).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
2

surprising. His aunt, Louise Homer, the great American

contralto, undoubtedly helped to nurture his love of vocal

music when he was a young boy. Later, while at the Curtis

Institute, he studied voice with Emilio de G o r g o r z a , ^ a

successful concert baritone who had joined the voice faculty

in 1925.3 After leaving the Institute in 1933,. he resumed

his vocal lessons in Vienna.^ Barber's baritone voice has

won the admiration of many musicians (Poulenc offered to

write some songs for him to sing), but as composition was

always his first love, his singing career is limited to

relatively few professional engagements. When Dover Beach

was recorded by Victor Records, he sang the voice part,

assisted by the Curtis String Quartet. Since, however, only

a small number of pressings was made of this recording, it is

now a collector's item.

As to the quality of the songs, one critic has

this tu say:

2. Nathan Broder, Samuel Barber (New York: G. Schirmer, Inc.


1954), 14.

3. Baker's Biographical Dictionary of Musicians, 4th Edition


(New York: G. Schirmer, Inc., 194U), 4ll.

4. Broder, 25.

5. RCA Victor, 8 9 9 8 .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
3

As a song writer Samuel Barber has few peers among


today's composers. It is in his songs that Bar
ber's native lyric gift has found some of its
happiest expression. Whenever I look over them I
I am reminded of a remark that Virg*l Thomson made
about Barber: :!He is pure in heart." That quality
of purity is everywhere evident in Barber's works
for the voice. Nothing is forced, there is no
striving for effect. They are always melodic and
singable.

Barber's songs do not follow a stereotyped pattern. Each set

ting is carefully conceived, capturing the mood and expression

of the text. Many of his songs, particularly those contained

in the song cycles, represent major contributions to the vocal

repertory by a contemporary composer.

Opus 2

No. 1 "The Daisies"


No. 2 "With Rue My Heart Is Laden"
No. 3 "Bessie Bobtail"

The three songs that are included in Opus 2 show

the lyrical qualities of Barber's early musical thought.

The emphasis is on clear tonality, on a simple, flowing vocal

line, and although not derived from folk songs, they

nevertheless show the spontaneity that is often associated

with them. The piano part, generally speaking, supports

6 . James W. Quiiiian, "The Songs of Samuel Barber,"


Repertoire I (October 1951 ).> 18.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
4

or illustrates the vocal line., but it is essentially an .

accompaniment, rather than an equal companion.

The first song in Opus2 "The Daisies," was


7
written in 1927. The text, from a short poem bearing the

same title, was written by James,Stephens. A short quotation

of the first stanza of the poem demonstrates the light-hearted,

ballad-like expression of the text.

In^the _scented bud of the morning 0,,


When tlie windy grSss^went rfppling farl
i^saw my jiear one walking^ sl'ow ( o
In tKe field where tKe daisies are.

The entire poem consists of three stanzas, each of which has

four lines with a rhyme scheme of ABAB. The accentual signs

that have been placed above the text are not intended to

indicate the metrical design of the poem, but rather to show

the musical accent that the composer has used in his setting.

The poem is set in quadruple-simple, or 4/4 time; each

unaccented word or syllable is set to an eighth-note, and

the accented words are given at least twice the latter

value. The simplicity of the rhythmic design with its

7. Broder, 100.

8 . James Stephens, "The Daisies," Collected Poems (New York:


The Macmillan Co., 1926), 53* Permission to reproduce
this poem was granted by the publishers.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
5

emphasis on flowing eighth-notes is in keeping with the mood

of the text, which is only twenty-three measures long and re

mains in the key of F major throughout. Each stanza of the

text is represented by one complete sentence of music; thus

the song comprises three complete sentences. Although the

second and third sentences are not exact restatements of the

first, they are only slight variants of it. Each of them

ends on the tonic triad of F major, the cadence in each

case being dominant seventh to tonic. For the most part,

the chords are largely limited to the tonic and subdominant

triads, and the dominant-seventh chord.

The second song in Cpus 2, which is based on A. E.

Housman's poem, "With Rue My Heart Is Laden," was written


C
in 1928. Harry Dexter makes the following comment about

this song In Musical Opinion:

The third song of this set, "With rue my heart


is laden," a setting of A. E. Housman's famous
poem, is, I feel, not so successful. The mood
is right; there is no over-dramatisation; it is,
just like the poem, too slick and glib in ex
pression for the heartbreaking thoughts it
offers. 0

9. Broder, 100.

10. Harry Dexter, "Samuel Barber and 'his Music,"


Musical Opinion 72 (April 1949), 344.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
6

Although Mr. Dexter states that this is the third song in

this set, it is actually listed as Opus 2, No. 2.

While the original key of this song is B minor, it

is also published in others. Because copies of it are more

readily available in the key of D minor, this version is used

for the present discussion.

Like the first song in Opus 2, this is a terse

setting of a short poem. The poem consists of two quatrains

with a rhyme scheme of ABAB, each quatrain being represented

by one complete musical sentence. The meter shifts from

3/4, to 4/4, to 5/4, and again back to 3/4. A short intro

duction (m. 1-3) leads to the first quatrain (see Example 1).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
7

Ex. I11

Awiarvte c&tiCaVkle J s84

rut vnv h u r t it Ud _ etv

r
w D o m in tn t P ro \ fi tti.n -> T o n ic

Each musical sentence is divided into an antecedent

and a consequent phrase. The antecedent phrase includes the

first two lines of the first quatrain, and the consequent the

remaining two. The second quatrain begins with an exact

repetition of the antecedent phrase of the first section,

but is concluded with a new consequent phrase. The short

diagram that follows will illustrate the formal design.

Introduction 1st Quatrain (A) 2nd Quatrain (A )


Antecedent Consequent Antecedent Consequ en t
M. 1-3 M. 3-8 M. 8-14 M. 14-19 M. 19-26
(a) (b) (a1 ) (o)

11. Copyright 1938, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
8

The first musical sentence ends with a half-cadence

on the minor dominant; the final cadence of the song is

essentially a leading tone seventh chord (C#EGBb ) progressing

to the tonic, a D major chord. In addition to common triads,

the diminished seventh chord and the major-minor seventh chord

are employed. The prolongation and resolution of the

dominant seventh chord of D minor, which appears at the

beginning and ending of both antecedent phrases (m. 4, 14, 2 6 ),

maintains the harmonic interest (see Example 1, m. 4-5).

The running eighth-note pattern used at the outset

of the song in the piano part pervades the whole work, pro

viding rhythmic flow. The vocal writing in the first two

songs of Opus 2 is largely diatonic and graciously lyrical

it practically "sings itself."

"Bessie Bobtail," the third song of Opus 2, was

written six years later than "With Rue My Heart Is Laden, " 12

but, as In the first two songs, the emphasis is still on

clear tonality and a simple, flowing vocal line. The

accompaniment, although not actually intruding upon the

vocal part, does illustratively point up the text by its

use of a three-note rhythmic figure, later extended, which

suggests the plodding walk of the animal (see Example 2).

12. Broder, 100.

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
9

Ex. 213

The poem, a delightful one, has three stanzas of

six lines each with a rhyme scheme for the first two stanzas

of AA, BB, CC; the last stanza retains the same rhyme scheme

for the first four lines, but the last couplet, the climax

of the poem, appears as follows:

0 God He knows: And, God He knows!


And, surely God Almighty knows!

The song is divided into four sections with a

short introduction and coda. Each section is set off by

either a fermata-chord or a poco allarganao measure. The

13. Copyright 1936, G. Schirmer.

14. James Stephens, "Bessie Bobtail," in Collected Poems


(New York: The Macmillan Co., 1926), 143.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
10

second and third sections (it would be possible to regard

them as one) are rhythmic variations of the first. The first

half of section four, which includes the words, "0 God He

knows: And, God He knows I" is the only part of the song that

does not include the plodding rhythmic figure.

The imabic pentameter of the text is maintained

by both metrical and textual stress throughout the first

section of the song (m. 1-2 6 ) with only a slight interruption

at measure 16. The three-note plodding figure in the

accompaniment continues to alternate between the tonic and

an incomplete form of the dominant harmony. At the close of

the first section, (m. 25-2 6 ) on the word "desperate, 11 a

shift is made to an E flat major seventh chord without the

fifth. This harmonic shift, suggestive of the Neapolitan

relationship, strongly reinforces the text.

Section two, which includes the complete text of

the second stanza, is a rhythmic variation of the first

eighteen measures of section one. The meter signature is

changed to 3 /2 and the plodding rhythmic figure is now

extended to four notes. The static repetition of the

harmonic progression, tonic to dominant in D minor, is

maintained, and the melody of section one, now subjected

to rhythmic alterations, is repeated. Thus we have a

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
11

rhythmic variation with the harmonic and melodic aspects

fixed. The second section ends on an E minor seventh chord,

.minus the fifth and with an added fourth. (EGDA.) It does

not convey to this writer the sensation of a chord in fourths.

Section three, beginning with the anacrusis in

measure thirty-nine, provides another variation of section

one.' This variation includes the first four lines of the

third stanza of the poem. The meter signature is again

changed, this time to 5/ 2 , and the plodding rhythmic figure

is extended to five notes. The use of sixteenth notes implies

a diminution of the four-note figure of section two. The

rather staid harmonic progression, tonic to dominant, pre

vails, and the vocal line is again a rhythmic variation of

that which is used in section one. This very short section,

almost chant-like, ends with the minor dominant in second

inversion.

The first half of section four, again with the

meter signature 2/ 2 , conspicuously lacks the three-note

rhythmic figure. The vocal line is involved in a series of

suspensions and appoggiaturas, with the G sharp diminished

triad assuming the leading harmonic role. The association

of the diminished triad with the word "God" of the text is

perhaps reminiscent of sixteenth-century tone painting.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
12

The second phrase of the fourth section begins after a

fermata, the plodding.rhythmic pattern now alternating

between a three- and a two-note pattern. The final words

of the text, "And God He knows 1", are sung without

accompaniment, ending on the tonic note D.

The coda is given to the piano alone, and the

first part of the melody as used in section one is once more

introduced to bring the song to a close. The final chord is

D minor.

Dover Beach, Opus 3

This composition belongs to Barber's earliest

period, often referred to as neo-romantic. Among the

published works it is listed as Opus 3* and was written in

1931. It is written for medium voice and string quartet,

but although the original score calls for a baritone, the

vocal line is equally suitable for mezzo-soprano. The text

of the vocal part, and the title of the composition itself,

are taken from the poem "Dover Beach" by Matthew Arnold.

The entire poem is included in the published score.

15. Refer also to Matthew Arnold, Poems (New York: The


Macmillan Co., 1940), 211-212.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
13

In "Dover Beach," the poet uses the image of the

sea to express the thoughts of nothingness, the feeling of

despair, disorder, and t u m u l t . T h e poem is written in blank

verse, with four stanzas of varying lengths. Although the

initial lines of the poem are in iambic pentameter, the

remaining lines follow irregular patterns.

James W. Quillian makes the following statements

about Dover Beach in Repertoire:

This work is extremely personal in its idiom.


In fact, Barber recorded it himself for Victor,
with the assistance of the Curtis String Quartet.
It begins with an accompanying figure in sixteenth
notes that depicts the gentle sighing of the sea.
Soon the other strings enter in and as the poem
becomes more and more filled with a passionate
yearning, the instruments become contrapuntally
involved moving to an intense climax. Before the
close there is a return to the first idea and the
work ends pianissimo. The vocal line, although
melodic, is of somewhat declamatory or quasi
recitative nature. However, the whole moves
flowingly and these are passages of real vocal
eloquence

The harmonic basis is quite simple as all chords

are triadic in origin, and dissonances are the result of

either triadic extension through the tertian system (seventh,

16. Cleanth Brooks, Jr. and Robert Penn Warren, Understanding


Poetry (New York: Henry Holt Co., 1938)* 554-555'.

17. James W. Qnillian, "The Songs of Samuel Barber," 19.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
14.

ninth and thirteenth chords), or triads with added tones.

There is a tendency toward mood suggestion by using triads

in a non-functional manner for the sake of their color

impressions. The introductory motive, which features a D

minor triad moving tc a G sharp minor triad, is typical of

the mood suggestion. Abrupt chromatic and enharmonic

modulations to remote keys occur throughout the central part

of the work, but the composition as a whole is stabilized by

the opening and closing sections, in which strong tonic

emphasis is evident.

The work is in episodical, ternary form (A-^BA2 ).

Examples 3 and 4 show the two principal Motives that are

used.

18
Ex. 3

Sal "Usto

18. Copyright 1936, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited w ithout permission.
15

Ex. 419
^ Motive2^

vu.

Vc.

The first section (A1, m. 1-53) is, in itself, ternary in

design (a'^ba2 ), part 1 of which begins in measure 1 and

extends to measure 1 9 . The first five measures constitute an

introduction composed of an ostinato-like figure in the second

violin, and the presentation of Motive 1 in the first violin.

Part two (b), which begins in measure 20 and

extends to measure 43, is based on Motive 2 (see Example 4),

and is much less stable tonally than the preceding one. It

opens in D minor, modulates abruptly to E flat minor in

measure 31* touches upon D flat major in measure 34, E minor

in measure 38, and I flat major in measures 41-43.

19. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
16

Motive 1 serves as the basis for part three,

(m. 44-53) again reiterating the tonic key, D minor. The

motto-like association of the G sharp minor triad (here

spelled enharmonically) with the D minor triad may be ob

served in measures 45-47. Measures 50-53 serve both as a

small coda to section one and a link to the next section.

The composer uses two stanzas of the poem for the first

section.

The third stanza, beginning "Sophocles long ago

. . . ," marks the second section (B), which extends from

measure 54 to 6 7 . The character of the music changes

abruptly in this section. The accompaniment consists of

simple chords moving in half notes, while the voice part

suggests a recitative style. It could be considered as


20
"recitativo accompagnato" or "recitativo stromentato."

D major is the point of departure, but the music moves

immediately away from this key, passing through the keys of

E major, C major, E minor, and back to D major at measure 60.

At this point the passage in D major that was used at the

start of this same section is resumed, but is altered after

two measures, moving from D major to C minor, and E minor.

20. Harvard Dictionary of Music, ed. Willi Apel (Cambridge:


Harvard University Press, 1946), 6 2 9 .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
The closing measures (m. 64-67) utilize Motive 2 and pass

through the keys of C major, A flat minor, and F flat major.

The dominant chord in this key (C flat, E fl..t, G flat)

becomes enharmonically the dominant in E minor, the opening

key of the final section. Although the middle section of

this work is rather short, it contrasts with the rest of the

composition by its change in character and its rapid flux of

tonality.

The third and final section (A^, m. 68-115), is

binary in design. One part concerns itself with Motive 1,

and the other with Motive 2. The order, however, is reversed,


P 1
the b section appearing before the a . In effect, the a of

the first section is omitted, causing an inverted order of

presentation to take place.

The material for part one of this binary form


O
(b , m. 68-97) is composed chiefly of Motive 2, being

similar to b^ of the first section (compare letter J, for

example, with letter C ) . It opens in the key of E minor,

touches upon D minor at measures 75-77* reverts to E minor,

and finally returns to D minor at measure 92 after a long

evasion of the tonic, extending from measure 84. Measure 92

is felt to be the climax of the composition, not only because

of the culminating effect of the harmonic progression (the

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
18

tonic key finally asserts itself decisively!), but also

because it is here that the vocal line reaches its highest

point. Prom here to the end of the work there is a strong

affirmation of the tonic key of D minor.

Part two (a^, m. 98-115)* consists of an almost

literal repetition of a^. The accompaniment is the same

(except for the interchange of parts) to measure 110, but

the solo part is altered from measure 104. Again, the

ostinato-like passage, and the motto-like association of the

D minor and G sharp minor triads set the mood of the music.

The coda (m. 116-123) is composed of Motive 1,

and the ostinato figuration. The harmonic feeling is that

of subdominant and tonic.

It is evident that the composer was very meticulous

in following the rhythm of the poem, and it appears, too,

that he has captured its mood and expressiveness. Repeated

notes are frequently used in the vocal line, which is pre

dominately conjunct in nature. It is undoubtedly this re-

peated-note aspect that James Quiilian^ had in mind when he

stated that the melodic line is quasi-recitative in character.

The vocal line is not difficult from an intervallic

21. James W. Quillian, "The Songs of Samuel Barber," 18.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
standpoint as there is only one diminished interval in the

entire work a descending leap of a diminished fifth (m. 89)

from C to F sharp.

The Poem The Musical Form

1st Stanza - 14 lines A (a1 b a2 )

2nd Stanza - 6 lines


3rd Stanza - 3 lines B (Recitative-like)

3rd Stanza - 5 lines


4th Stanza - 9 lines A (b2 a^)

(The last word of the text


might," is a part of the
coda). Coda

A piano reduction of the score is available, but

is not recommended for performance.

Opus 10

No. 1 "Rain has Fallen"


No. 2 "Sleep Now"
No. 3 "I Hear an Army"

The three songs in Opus 10 were written in 1936

when Samuel Barber was only twenty-six years old. These songs

are settings of poems from Chamber Music by James Joyce, a

collection of thirty-six poems published in 1907, and the

first of Joyce's books to reach the public. In his "Editor's

Preface" to Chamber Music in The Portable James Joyce, Harry

Levin, the editor, says:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
20

The qualities and limitations of these thirty-


six poems, as well as their lack of pretentious
ness, are implicit in their title. They are
slight, elusive, formal, above all musical.
Yeats called some of his poems Words for Music,
Perhaps. There was no "perhaps" about Joyce5s
intention, as a singer, to write lyrics that
could really be sung. His success may be
measured by the number of musicians who have
provided them with effective settings. 22

Of the thirty-six poems, Barber has chosen numbers

thirty-two, thirty-four, and thirty-six. As none of the

individual poems has a name, the song titles are derived from

the initial words of the first line of each poem.

The text of "Rain has Fallen" conveys a nostalgic

mood, and the musical setting explicitly reflects this

quality. The texture is based upon arpeggiated, groping

harmonies that intermittently feel their way to strong

harmonic goals. In the accompaniment the interval of the

octave, by its many repetitions, becomes a unifying element

in the formal plan. In other works of Barber an interval

rather than a specific chord will be found to provide formal

cohesion. The over-all key of this song is unquestionably

D minor. (Although published in other keys, D minor is the

original one.) With the exception of the progressions from

22. James Joyce, "Collected Poems," in The Portable James


Joyce, ed. by Harry Levin (New York: The Viking Press,
i i r , 627.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
21

dominant to tonic in some cadences, there is practically no

feeling of harmonic movement in the traditional sense. The

chord structures, however, are clearly evolved from the

tertian system.

The poem consists of two stanzas of four lines

each with a rhyme scheme of ABAB for each stanza. The


23
term "strophic song" is appropriate because each stanza,

with but slight modifications, is sung to the same melody.

An introduction of four measures precedes the first stanza,

and a short coda rounds out the last section.

The following example, which begins with the third

measure of the introduction and includes the title words of

the song, illustrates the arpeggiated harmonic pattern as

well as the stress that is placed upon the interval of the

octave. Note the filled-in octave, as well as the octave

leap.

23. Harvard Dictionary of Music, 713.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
22

Ex. 524

Voice

The accompaniment pattern as it appears above is

present throughout most of the song. The pedal on A in the

bass of the piano part proves to be a dominant pedal to D

minor, and, in measure eight, a cadence in D minor is con

summated. The penultimate chord in the cadence is not the

dominant, but rather its substitute, the first inversion of

the augmented triad on the mediant scale degree. The strong

tonic cadence occurs in the middle of each stanza of the

text rather than at the end. The punctuation that occurs at

the end of the first stanza is achieved by melodic and

rhythmic means rather than by harmonic definition. Apropos

of this procedure, Karl Eschman makes the following statement:

24. Copyright 1936, G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
23

Caesuras in the past have been indicted by


melodic inflection and by harmonic as well as
rhythmic discharge; we must now depend in some
cases upon one of these above with but slight
assistance from the other two.2?

The punctuation is achieved by a melodic inflection

(the C sharp in the vocal line moving down a half-step to

B sharp), and by a rhythmic caesura; a poco rallentando is

indicated, and the rhythmic values are lengthened (see

Example 6 ).

Ex. 626

25. Karl E-schman, Changing Forms In Modern Music (Boston:


E. C. Schirmer Co., 19^5)/ 53.

26. Copyright 1936, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
24

A four-measure bridge section (m. 12-15* a fragment

of which appears in the above example) provides a successful

connection between the two stanzas of the text. The rhythmic

flow is maintained by a sequential, cascading eighth-note

pattern which, along with a descending octave leap in half

notes, is framed by the interval of the octave. The dominant

scale tone of D minor is stressed, and the stage is set for

the eventual return to the tonic key. Measure 14, also a

part of the bridge section, is noteworthy because of the

cross relations.

The second stanza begins in measure 16 with the

melody of the first section, slightly modified, being

reiterated. A slight rhythmic modification of the melody

may be noted in the first phrase of the second stanza in

measure 18 along with the addition of three notes at the

close of the last verse. The arpeggiated rhythmic pattern

persists, and the first half of the second stanza is again

set off by a strong melodic cadence culminating on the tonic

note. The caesura that is used at the completion of the text

(m. 2 3 ) is basically the same as that which was used to

complete the text for the first stanza. It is significant

that the climactic point of the song is allocated to the piano

rather than the voice. The rising octaves which lead to the

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
25

climactic point in measure 24 are introduced in measure

23 while the voice is sustaining the final word of the text.

The text of the last line of thesecond stanza,

"Speak to your heart," is repeated in the coda section. The

penultimate measure of the final cadence manifests a

sustained dominant pitch in the voice and piano. The melodic

figure that appears in the treble of the piano part tends to

enhance the leading tone of D minor, and the descending leap

from the dominant to the tonic note in the yoice and the bass

of the piano part brings the song to an effective close.

In the vocal part of "Rain has Fallen" the composer

captures the melancholy, lyric quality of the poem with the

short haunting motive that is stated twice (the motive is

varied in the second phrase) in each section.Like the

harmonic pattern, it appears to "feel its way" to a suitable

resting place.

Ex. 727

M o T iv e ^

Rain Has ja U en TKe Jay 0 Come iJtoong tl*. laJLentries

27. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
26

Mr. Quillian makes the following statement about

the vocal line of this song:

Strangely enough the voice line does not seem


to flow as easily as one expects from Barber.
There is a disturbing tendency to let the voice
simply drop a fifth. When this happens for the
third time in this short song, at the final
cadence, and when the piano part also drops a
fifth, I feel that the whole effect of the song
is dissipated and the listener left wondering
what has happened.2

Despite Mr. Quillian's statement, the drop of the fifth seems

most suitable in view of the rather chromatic, "wondering"

melody.

"Sleep Now," the second song in Opus 10, is a

setting of a poem of three stanzas of four lines each. With

the exception of the second stanza, the lines are unrhymed.

The form of the song is three-part episodical with a short

postlude. Generally speaking, the harmonic progressions

follow the traditional, functional type of harmony, and

although third-relationships are used, root movement by fifth

predominates. The chords are derived from the tertian system,

with the diminished-minor seventh chord being particularly

emphasized. The tranquil first and last sections enclose an

agitated middle section, in which exemplary use is made of

28. James W. Quillian, "The Songs of Samuel Barber," 19.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
27

a stormy figure outlining a ninth, a figure that returns


in the coda section.

The interval of a second (a major second from F

sharp to G sharp in this song), which in several of Barber's

later compositions becomes almost a trademark, is supplemented

in the second measure by a minor third, and the resulting

vertical structure is a G sharp diminished-minor seventh.

(See Example 8 , m. 1-2.) The movement of this seventh chord

to one whose root is F sharp is the most significant harmonic

movement of the first and third sections.

Ex. 829

A n j i t i t t tr&n^u.illo J = 40 _lf6
IV
OKt

SWep m w 0

con

29. Copyright 1936, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
28

Although the key of the first and third sections

is P sharp minor, the composer frequently uses the F sharp

major triad in place of the tonic-minor triad. When the

identifying minor third is added to the P sharp sonority

(note the piano part in the third measure of Example 8 ) a

ninth is also present. Actually, in part one, the P sharp

minor triad is outlined only in passing (m. 9 ) on the second

half of the beat. The hocket-like treatment at the cadence,

which can also be observed in the fourth measure of Example 8 ,

is again used in measure 8 . Although an F sharp major triad

is outlined at the cadence in measure 8 , the rhythmic stress

is given to the diminish-minor seventh chord E^G^E^D^,

which acts as an altered VII^ in P sharp minor. An

extension of the cadence finally leads to a G sharp

diminished-minor seventh in measure 10. The first section of

the ternary form, disregarding the cadential extension,- ends

in measure 8 . Although there is room for question, it appears

that this is an example of a "closed 3-part f o r m . "3

The "storm" begins in measure 10 with the intro

duction of the four-note figure for part two note the

interval of a ninth.

30. Cedric Thorpe Davie, Musical Structure And Design


(London: Dennis Dobson, 19^3)t 35.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
29

Ex. 931
noSJO e

Both the vocal line and the piano part emphasize the interval

of a ninth. There are several intermediate harmonic goals in

the B section. A cadence is made in B flat minor at the

change of key in measure 13 the G natural in the vocal

part (m. 13) has a Dorian flavor. After passing through C

minor in measure 14, with a suggestion of F minor in measure

15, the tonal center moves to A flat minor (m. 16-19). The

fermata chord in measure 1 9 , which gives a suggestion of a

half cadence on the dominant minor-major ninth of A flat

minor, is followed by a G sharp diminished-minor seventh chord

outlined in measure 20. Part 3, or A2 (m. 21), presents the

same material that was used in Part 1, but in a modified

form. The postlude or coda begins in measure 29, and, as was

previously mentioned, the four-note figure that was used in

the B section is reiterated.

31. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
30

The vocal line is prevailingly diatonic for the

entire song and does not present any specific problems.

Opus 10, No. 3 j "I Hear an Army," is undoubtedly-

performed more than any other song that Samuel Barber has

written to date. InMusical Opinion,Harry Dexter makes the

following statement:"The third of this set, 'I hear an

army,' I count as one of the most important of modern songs. "32

It.is a powerful setting of a poem which is in

essence a "dream-vision." A vigorous, strident figure for

the piano, starting forte, most vividly brings to life the

opening lines of the poem: "I hear an army charging upon the

land, And the thunder of horses plunging, foam about their

knees: . . . The poem is made up of three stanzas of

four lines each, the first and third lines of each stanza

being rhymed. For the first section the composer alters the

metrical pulse of the music to fit the irregular rhythm of

the text. It is difficult to find a meaningful classification

for the formal design of this songj it suffices to say that,

barring key relationships, the formal pattern is somewhat

suggestive of a rondo. There are three salient musical

entities that bring about formal cohesion. The first,

32. Harry Dexter, "Samuel Barber and His Music," 3^-.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
31

Motive 1, is the vigorous rhythmic figure in the accompaniment,

consisting of an eighth and two sixteenth notes, which pervades

almost the entire song. (An eighth note rest is frequently

used in place of the first eighth note in this figure.) The

intervals of a fifth, and, particularly the octave, are

stressed in this motive. Motives 2 and 3 (Motive 3 shows a

close relationship to Motive 2) conclude the presentation

of the principal material. The following example shows

Motive 1 and Motive 2:

Ex. 10 33

jt ] A ll e g r o con ju.oco J r ll6 p M o tiv e 2

M o tiv e 1 I har_ a n __

m
il

33. Copyright 1939> G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
32

Motive 3 appears in measure 17 in the piano part:

Ex. II34
M o tiv e 3

Each motive retains its basic rhythmic structure each time it

appears. A perfect fourth is stressed at the head of each

motive, and the high note of each motive is followed by a

descending half step. The over-all key is C minor, the

original key, and while not all of the harmonic progressions

can be identified as traditional, there is nevertheless much

evidence of the traditional, functional type of harmony.

Two musical sentences are used for each stanza of

the text. Each sentence is clearly divided into an ante

cedent and a consequent phrase, and, with only two exceptions,

each antecedent phrase is begun with either Motive 2 or

Motive 3- It is this alternation between these two motives

that is somewhat suggestive of rondo treatment.

34. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
33

Motive 1, which provides a short introduction (see

Example 10), leads to Motive 2. The harmony as given in the

first three measures is incomplete, but It nevertheless

suggests the tonic, and perhaps the Phrygian or Neapolitan

relationship. At measure 5* and continuing through Measure

6 , the tonic and the leading tone seventh chords alternate.

The first sentence ends in measure 9 with an augmented triad

on A flat in C minor appearing as a cadence chord. The

vocal part also outlines this triad in its descent to the

E natural.

The melodic line of the second sentence, which

begins with the words, "Arrogant, in black," outlines an

augmented-major seventh chord on E flat. While neither

Motive 2 nor Motive 3 is used in this section, a reference

is made to Motive 2 in the vocal line in measure 12.

The tonal center shifts temporarily to E flat minor, but

returns to the dominant triad of C minor at the cadence

(m. 17) that concludes the first stanza of the text. The

cadence itself emphasizes the third relationship a C flat

major triad moving to a G major triad.

Motive 3 is introduced by the piano in measure 17.

This section from measure 17 to 20, a bridge passage, occurs

over a dominant prolongation in the key of C minor. At the

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
34

same time that a strong harmonic cadence in C minor is

reached (m. 21) the vocal line introduces the Motive 3

along with the second stanza of the text. The antecedent

phrase of this section ends on a C minor triad in measure 23.

As the root of the penultimate chord to the cadence in

measure 23 is D flat, the Phrygian second degree, or

Neapolitan relationship, is in evidence.

Motive 1 (m. 25) is transferred to the treble of

the piano part at the outset of the consequent phrase and a

sequential pattern is set up. The tonality from this point

to measure 38 is not clear.

The vocal line of the second sentence, which

concludes the text of the second stanza, is made up of Motive

2 over Motive 1 (elaborated) in the treble of the piano part.

In measure 36, a whole tone triad is outlined. This chord,

which may be considered as an altered dominant, leads strongly

to the harmonic goal of D flat major. As before, the text

of the next stanza is begun at the same time the harmonic

cadence is made.

The first sentence, which concludes the text of the

first half of the third and final stanza (m. 42-47), utilizes

Motive 3 in both the piano and vocal part. It is conceivable

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
35

that the material used in the consequent phrase of this

sentence, beginning with the anacrusis in measure 42, is

derived from both Motive 2 and Motive 3- The tonality shifts

from D flat major in the antecedent phrase to E flat major

and E flat minor in the consequent phrase. The cadential

extension of the consequent phrase (m. 46-47), outlines a

C flat major triad and a C flat major seventh chord

respectively. The material, which is used in imitation at

the octave below, is clearly derived from the head of Motives

2 and 3. The harmonic movement of the C flat major seventh

chord (m. 47) to a G major-minor ninth at measure 48, again

stresses the third relationship. This ninth chord on G, which

is retained from measures 48 to 51> provides a dominant pro

longation to the tonic key of C minor.

The last couplet of the poem, which begins with

the words "My heart, have you no wisdom thus to despair?", is

introduced by neither Motive 2 nor Motive 3. The latter does

occur, however, in the bass of the piano part in measure 5 0 .

The climactic point of the song is reached in measure 54,

following extended dominant and tonic pedals. In the

concluding section the consequent phrase of this sentence

(beginning after the fermata chord in measure 54) again

restates Motive 3> over continued tonic emphasis.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
36

In the coda, beginning in measure 57 and extending

to the end of the song, Motives 1 and 3 again appear over a

C major triad. The stress that is placed on the note D flat

in this section further enhances the Phrygian or Neapolitan

relationship. The song ends on an open fifth, C-G, which is

reinforced by octave doubling.

These three songs present a decided step forward

from those of Opus 2. The vocal line is much freer and more

chromatic, and the piano part, instead of revolving around

the vocal line, is an independent, although still integral,

part of the whole.

Opus 13

No. 1 "A Nun Takes a Veil"


No. 2 "Secrets of the Old"
No. 3 "Sure on This Shining Star"
No. 4 "Nocturne"

The four songs in Opus 13 are settings of poems by

Gerard Manley Hopkins, W. B. Yeats, James Agee, and Frederic

Prckosch. With the exception of "Nocturne," the musical

settings perhaps risk banality in their simplicity; at least,

Harry Dexter states that the first three songs in Opus 13

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
"come as something of a shock after the songs of Opus 1 0 ."35

He feels that the vocal line of the first three songs in

Opus 13 is far too restricted in range and expression, and

that the piano part is merely a succession of what he calls

"common chords." In spite of Mr. Dexters opinion, however,

it would seem that the composer is not at all ashamed to use

the most simple settings in order to convey what he believes

to be the message of the poem.

The first song, "A Nun Takes a Veil," a setting

of an early poem by Gerard Manley Hopkins, ?.s written in

1937. The caption of the poem is "Heaven-Haven" with the

subtitle "A Nun Takes a V e i l . "3^ The poem is made up of

two stanzas with a rhyme scheme of ABBA. The meter does

not adhere to a regular pattern, and the composer has very

carefully adapted the music to the irregular rhythm of the

text.

The song is only twenty-two measures in length,

consisting of a double period, or two sentences, the

antecedent phrase of each sentence being the same. While

35. Harry Dexter, "Samuel Barber And His Music" (March 1949),
286.
3 6 . Poems of Gerard Manley Hopkins, ed. Robert Bridge (London
Oxford University Press, 1931), 8 .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
38

the cadential pattern is the same for each consequent phrase,

the beginning of the second consequent phrase is different

from that of the first. The chord structures are clearly

derived from the tertian system, being for the most part

triads. The diminished-minor seventh chord, which also

assumed an important harmonic role in the song "Sleep Now,"

is again stressed at the close of.each sentence. The tonal

center is D, and although the emphasis is on the Phrygian

scale, a free "interchange of mode"^ over a single tonic

is apparent. The root movement of chords is predominantly

by seconds and fifths, the chord progressions for each

sentence being basically the same.

The first sentence ends (m. 9-10) with a half

cadence on what might be termed the Phrygian dominant

(ACE^G). Following an extension of the phrase (m. 10-11),

which provides a link between the two sentences making up

the song, the "true dominant" of the minor mode on D (AC^E)

appears in measure 12 leading to the second sentence.

The initial chords of each sentence are arpeggiated

in the piano part, which is always just an accompaniment for

37. John Vincent, The Diatonic Modes in Modern Music (New


York: Mills Music, Inc., 1951)* 237 Discussion of
"Interchangeability of Mode."

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
39

the simple vocal line. By means of this apparent simplicity

the composer has certainly evoked the mood of the Hopkins

poem.

The second song in Opus 13 is a setting of the

poem, "Secrets of the Old," by W. B. Y e a t s . W. B. Yeats

wrote a group of eleven poems under the heading, "A Man Young

and Old." "Secrets of the Old," the ninth one in the group,

was written in 1928;39 it consists of three stanzas of

six lines each. In the first two stanzas, the second, fourth,

and sixth lines are rhymed. In the last, "slant rimes'1^ for

the second, fourth, and sixth lines are evident. The

rhythmic scheme is irregular.

This song was written in 1938,^ and, like the first

one in the set, is best.performed by female voice. In it we

again find much of Barber's happy faculty of fitting the

music to the rhythm of the words. The song begins in rapid

38. W. B. Yeats, The Collected Poems of W. B. Yeats (New York:


The Macmillan Co., 1^51), 22l'.

39. Ibid., xi.

40. Cleanth Brooks and Robert Penn Warren, Understanding


Poetry (New York: Henry Holt Co., 1938), b4?. "Slant
rimes" are approximate rimes. For instance, "rover" and
"lover," or "steel" and "chill."

41. Broder, 101.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
40

five-eight meter with the piano providing an eighth-note

background. This accompanying rhythmic background persists

throughout the entire song, not always, however, in five-eight

meter.

The form is ternary with a very short rhythmic

introduction. The chords are limited to the tonic,

subdominant, and the dominant-seventh, and it is only the

frequent shifts in the meter that serve to disguise the

rather simple, even stereotyped, chord progressions. While

the over-all key is C minor (the C major triad is frequently

used in place of C minor), the first and third sections of

the three-part form begin with the submediant triad of

B flat major, this key being established before ultimately

moving to C.

Part 1, or A1, itself exemplifies the temcry

principle with the addition of a codetta section. The brief

diagram that follows shows the over-all design of Part 1.


o

Part I (A1 )

i ?
Introduction a b a Codetta
, m. 1 -2 m. 2-7 m. 8-12 m..13-18 m. 19-28
B : vi IV and V' I (mixolydian) Bb-> C C

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
41

The text of the poem is not equally distributed over

the three sections that make up the ternary form. Section 1

(a^) utilizes the first stanza of the text, and the first

three lines of the second stanza. Section 2 (b) is limited

to the last three lines of text of the second stanza, and

Section 3 (a^) includes the last stanza of the text.

Part 2 (B) retains the characteristic accompaniment

figure in five-eight meter as the vocal line adheres to the

iambic pentameter of the text. The key throughout this

section is clearly C minor, ending in measure 38 on the

dominant triad. This triad is not resolved to the tonic,

but is, instead, succeeded by a G minor triad. The G minor

triad then functions as the submediant chord in B flat major

as at the beginning, and a return is made to the key of B flat

major and the beginning of Part 3* which is a literal

restatement of Part 1 without the codetta section. There is

a three-measure extension of the cadence chord of C major at

the conclusion of the song.

"Sure on This Shining Night," the third song in

this set, is based upon one of the poems in the first book

entitled Permit Me Voyage, by James Agee, a young American

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
42

42
poet of about the same age as Samuel Barber. It consists

of two stanzas of four lines each with the addition of a

final couplet. The rhythmic scheme is irregular, only the

second and fourth lines of the first stanza being rhymed.

Although the song is an unpretentious one, it is


43
one of the best of the early period. The vocal line is

one long, flowing melody from the beginning to the end, and

the piano writing is an important aspect of the ove-r-all

design rather than a mere accompanying part. This is the

first song in which the voice and piano are treated in

canonic imitation. The chords and the harmonic progressions,

as in the first two songs in this set, revolve around a key

center, falling into functional patterns. The chord structures

are clearly derived from the tertian system, simple triads

again predominating. On the basis of key, the formal

pattern can be classified as ternary.

Over the tonic triad of B flat major, introduced

by the piano in measure 1, the voice, acting as the leader

42. James Agee, Permit Me Voyage (New Haven: Yale University


Press, 1934), 14.

43. Broder, 101. "Sure on This Shining Night" was written in


1938.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
43

in the canonic imitation, begins the melody^4 in measure 2

(Part 1, A1), and the piano (m. 3) imitates the vocal line

a minor third higher (see Example 12). The imitation is

tonal rather than real as slight adjustments are made in the

follower in order to retain the key of B flat major. The

antecedent phrase ends in measure 4 with the mediant triad

acting as a substitute for the dominant on the cadence chord.

Ex. 12^ 5

A n JU n te J = i"0 p M o tiv e

V oite

44. The motive that is used in this melody is again employed


by Barber in his Essay for Orchestra, which was also
written in 1938. *fhe writer is indebted to Professor
Albert T. Luper for pointing this out.

45. Copyright 1941, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
44

The voice, which begins the consequent phrase in

measure is answered by the piano at the major third above.

The consequent phrase ends in measure 9> and a common chord

modulation is made to D minor.

Part 2 (B) begins in measure 10, and the climax of

the song is reached in measure 13 on the word "All." Only

the head of the melody as it appears in the vocal part (see

Example 12, bracketed notes) is treated in imitation in the

second part, being answered by the piano at the fourth below.

The cadence at the end of the antecedent phrase in this

section strongly suggests what has been termed the "Landini,"


hfi
or as Gustave Reese prefers, the "under-third cadence":

i.e., the leading tone moves down to the sixth scale degree

before moving to the tonic. ^

The consequent phrase of the second part (m. 17-20)

prepares for, while avoiding the return of the tonic of B flat

major. The melodic movement in the piano part (m. 19-20) at

46. Gustave Reese, Music in The Renaissance (New York: W. W.


Norton Co., 1954), 44.

4?. The similarity of the head motive as used in this song


with that of the Essay for Orchestra is again vividly
apparent from measures 1 6 to 16. Here the note values
of the head motive are similar to those used in the
Essay.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
the conclusion of the phrase, is again suggestive of the

so-called "under-third cadence."

Part 3 (A^) is a literal restatement of Part 1.

It should be noted, however, that the piano now acts as the

leader and the voice as the follower in the imitation. The

plagal cadence that occurs at the conclusion of the last

couplet (m. 29-30 ) is succeeded by another, more simple one,

which extends the sentence, and the piano part brings the

song to a close in measure 34 on the tonic triad of B flat

major.

The concluding song in this set, "Nocturne," is


2iA
based on a poem by Frederic Prokosch. The poem consists

of five stanzas of four lines each with a rhyme scheme of

ABAB. In his setting, the composer has chosen to omit the

third stanza of the poem.

The feeling of this darkly passionate poem has been .

fully captured by Barber's somewhat turgid setting. The

sextuplet eighth-note rhythmic pattern that pervades the

entire song is somewhat reminiscent of a similar pattern that

was used in the earlier song, "Rain Has Fallen." The thematic

48. Frederic Prokosch, Chosen Poems (New York: Doubleday Co.,


1947), 13.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
46

material here consists of two melodic entities: the first

melody, which is used for the first and third stanzas of the

poem, will be designated as A; the second melody, used for

the second and fourth stanzas of the poem will be referred to

as B. The following diagram of the formal scheme is based

solely on the thematic material.

Intro. A B A B
Measure: 1-2 3-13 14-24 25-34 35-47

Coda - Intro. Material


47-50

This song presents a problem in harmonic analysis

of a sort that has not occurred up to this point. The

accompaniment stresses the linear approach, and it is often

difficult, if not impossible, to determine which note, or

notes, belong to any given vertical structure. Furthermore,

it is generally impossible to ascribe a clearly predominant

key center to any section or portion of a section. As the

resulting vertical structures appear to be based on both the

tertian and quartal systems and combinations thereof, and, as

it is often impossible to determine the roots of the various

structures, an analysis based upon scale formations seems

most feasible. The first degrees of the various scales will

be determined by ascertaining the root, or root representative

for, the apparent prevailing vertical structure. In the

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
47

example below, measure 1, D sharp is the root of the first

vertical structure, and it therefore acts as the first degree

of the scale. When the root is ambiguous, other reasoning

must be used to determine the first note of the scale. After

the scale formation is determined, the tonality at any given

point can be hypothesized. The scale formation below

emphasizes the tonality of D sharp minor that begins and

ends the composition. Most often the changing scale forma

tions can be determined in respect to the phrase or sentence

structure, although in some cases it appears more reasonable

to begin a new scale formation at the cadence-measure of a

phrase rather than at the beginning of the new phrase. The

changing scale formations will be designated in the discussion

that follows.

The song begins with a two-measure introduction in

the piano part. The sextuplet rhythmic pattern, which

emphasizes intervals of a perfect fourth, establishes the

mood of the poem. It is derived from the following scale

formation:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
48

Ex. 1349

A n d a n t e , u p o co v n o jfe J > 5 8

P <3oUe e i osteiuto

The first melody, A, begins in measure 3. (See

Example 14). It consists of a complete sentence which is

divided into two equal segments. The consequent phrase is,

with the exception of the last note, merely a repetition of

the antecedent phrase transposed up a major third. The scale

formations are also transposed to the same interval.

49. Copyright 1941, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
49

Ex. l450

L-
*
clot e *ny da >oth y o u r ' j

7P g r - f
% 5
=
jpM f- W
9-
t p ' 1 - 4 -

m r = S k

The first sentence is ten measures long, and it

seems to be divided by the scale patterns into four, four,

and two. A reference to the first beat of the preceding

example will show a G natural and E in the piano part and an

A natural in the vocal part. The major sixth interval G up

to E with the root representative of E was selected, and the

scale formation was begun on E:

E F# (G -(/) (A -A^) BC^D E 51

50. Ibid.

51. The "Interchangeability of Mode" as expressed by John


Vincent, The Diatonic Modes in M o d e m Music, 23, can
be observedin this scale formation: both G natural
and G sharp are used as the third scale degree; A
natural and A sharp are used for the fourth scale
degree.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
The minor tetrachord appears to he the most prominent in this

phrase. Although the descending bass line (G down to B) in

the piano part outlines a fragment of the Lydian scale on G,

the scale formation on E nevertheless seems to predominate.

The accompaniment figuration stresses the interval of a

fourth, and while the fourth is also used vertically, the

intervals derived from the tertian system predominate through

measure 6 .

The scale pattern moves down a minor third to C

sharp in measure J, and outlines the major mode:

C#CX or DE^F#G#A# (B^-B^) (/.

This scale pattern is used from measure 7 through measure

10. The vertical structures are derived primarily from the

tertian system the first beat in measure 10 , however,

being a fourth-chord on E sharp.

In measure 11, the scale pattern shifts to B

natural. The harmonic movement from the fourth beat of

measure 11 to the first beat of measure 12 provides a

dominant to tonic progression in B minor. The vertical

harmony in measure 11 strongly suggests the dominant

harmony of B minor; the scale formation also indicates

B minor (see page 51).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
51

B C#D EF^ (G -G^) A#B .

The harmonic movement of the introduction and the

first sentence can be summarized as follows: the introduc

tion is based on a scale of D sharp minor; in measure 3, at

the beginning of the antecedent phrase of the first sentence,

the vertical harmony is derived from Dorian scale on E; in

measure 7 , at the end of the first phrase, the vertical

harmony is based on the major mode on C sharp; the B minor

scale is used to end the consequent phrase. Although there

are several different scale formations in this section, the

important harmonic movement is that from D sharp minor to

B minor.

The second stanza of the poem, along with the

second melody, B, begins in measure 14 (see Example 15).

Note that the head motive of this melody is derived from

the first sentence (see Example 14, measure 2). This

entire section, from measure 14 to measure 24, is based on

only two scale formations, and the vertical structures are

derived primarily from the tertian system. A scale built

on G sharp is used for the antecedent phrase of this, the

second sentence, and a scale built on B is followed by the

scale on G sharp, which concludes the section. The scales

are as follows:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
52

The B melody itself is less chromatic than the A.

Ex. 15^2 Melody B


H5]

.. * x: + . , j*... *).^c ..... d.-

waves a._crojj these. Kope less F ill m y Keart-----^ iiy

w/
j -tpLj-i [CU*P- y r J [ p g r L*J J-
<

ft--

The B major scale formation is used for only two

measures (m. 17-18) in this entire section. The changes

from the G sharp scale (m. 14-16) to the B scale (m. 17-18)

and again back to G sharp (m. 19) are significant aural

divisions. As in the first section, the emphasis is again

on the third relationship.

52. Copyright 19^1, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
53

The fourth stanza begins in measure 25 (as

previously stated, the composer has omitted the third

stanza) and the A melody returns. The antecedent phrase

is essentially the same as it was before. The scale

pattern on E natural is again used, and in measure 29, the

pattern shifts momentarily to C sharp. In measure 30,

however, the consequent phrase is now transposed up a minor

second, being also slightly altered at the end. The

following scale formation is used for measures 30 through

33:

ABA (D-D^) EF^GA.

The consequent phrase ends in measure 34, where

the vertical harmony is very definitely a C sharp major triad.

This section therefore begins with a scale built on E and it

ends on a C sharp major triad. The third relationship


JL
(E to C ) is thereby again apparent.

An exact restatement of the B melody, beginning

with the words "Northward flames Orion's horn," and extending

from measure 35 to 43, appears transposed up a major second.

A scale built on A sharp, or, enharmonically, B flat, is used

from measure 35 through measure 42 (see page 54).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
54

A#B#C#D# (E _E# or F ) q (A -a #).

In measure 43 the scale built on G sharp again

returns. The last five measures of the song (the last four

measures being considered as a coda) are again based on the

scale of D sharp minor, closing on a D sharp major triad.

The method of harmonic analysis based upon scale

formations rather than keys and the traditional Roman

numeral approach (I-IV-V-I etc.), is not, of course, a new

procedure. When one states that a composition employs a

tone series or that the pentatonic or heptatonic scale

predominates, he is emphasizing a scale-formation aspect.

It should be pointed out that the presence of these scale

formations does not preclude the existence of key centers or

of traditional, functional harmony in a work. However, this

means of analysis does provide a useful concept when key

centers are vague or ambiguous.

Opus 18

No. 1 "The Queen's Pace on the Summery Coin"


No. 2 "Monks and Raisins"

The first song in Opus 1 8 , entitled "The Queen's

Face on the Summery Coin," is based on a poem by Robert

Horan, a personal friend of Samuel Barber, who indicates that

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
55

the words of this poem have been used by "exclusive

permission. 11 The poem is not separately published at the

time of this writing.

The text of the poem is somewhat bizarre (almost

surrealistic), the musical setting being conceived in such

a manner as to reflect this quality very effectively. There

are many false relations, and there is virtually no feeling

of harmonic progression in the traditional sense. As the

key centers, however, are mostly quite clear, the present

discussion will be based upon them rather than on scale

formations. The form of the song is ternary with a brief

introduction and coda.

The introduction to a\ Part 1, is built upon the

ascending third, f sharp to a, establishing the tonality of

F sharp minor. The accompaniment is composed of a simple

two-part canon-like texture, featuring false relations. The

persistent use of B flat (=A$) and A natural in both the voice

part and the canonic imitation, constitutes the false rela

tion; the triad that cannot decide whether it is major or

minor adds a plaintive note to the poem's expression of

futility (see Example 16).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
56

Ex. 1653

A v tia n te cov\ vnoTo J = 8M


El
86
'ong )- w
ppp
Cjtietn'i ontti* Sum.Mtf.y coin

i i " *

<y

RfcVtO1
*
[p C - r _ U J
I
The tonality of Part 1 is P sharp minor to

measure 14, the harmony being static centered on f sharp.

A sudden shift is made in measure 15 to E flat major and

minor simultaneously, the minor mode predominating in

measure 16. An altered subdominant chord in measure 17

becomes an altered submediant chord in the key of C minor.

This resolves to the tonic of C in measure 18. By addition

of another third the tonic becomes an augmented-major seventh

chord (m. 1 9 ), but finally the chord is reduced to a simple

major triad that closes this section in measure 2 0 .

53. Copyright 1944, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
57

Part 2, B, begins in measure 21 and extends to

measure 33. It, too, is characterized by the exploitation

of the false relation. Both the harmony and the tonality

are very unstable, the emphasis is on the chromatic scale,

no key being definitely established. The material is

treated in a sequential manner:

Ex. 1754

c\ocK wh( r e o n 'th e Kur & p o \ti u y

The composer seems to have captured the mood of the text

throughout this section. The "copper clock of destiny"

appears to be ticking away, and the instability of this

entire musical setting lends itself to the expression of

futility. The rigidity of the bar-line is often overcome,

and the composer is quite daring in his accentuation of the

54. Copyright 1944, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
58

words. The final chord of this section (C^E^G^) in

measures 32 and 33 serves as the dominant of the tonic key

of ..the last section. This is the only chord in the middle

section that seems to have a definite structural and tonal

function.

p
Part 3* A , is a short restatement of the first

motive, which is associated (as in the beginning of the

composition, see Example 16) with the false relationship.

The opening mood of the song is reestablished as well as

the tonic key of F sharp minor.

The coda begins in measure 39 and extends through

measure 40. Nathan Broder states that the last two measures

of this song manifest p o l y h a r m o n y . 55 Accepting this inter

pretation, the composer appears to combine the tonic and sub

mediant triads. The D sharp minor triad is clearly outlined

on the first beat, and the strong open fifth in the bass

(l/-A# ) along with the P sharp in the treble, in effect,

combines the submediant tonality with the tonic. The close

identity of the tonic with the submediant, and the use of

the submediant triad as a substitute for the tonic, can be

observed frequently in other works of Samuel Barber.

55. Broder, 50.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
59

The second song in Opus 18, entitled "Monks and

Raisins," was written in 1943* one year later than the first

one.The poem was written by Jose Garcia Villa,57 and

also somewhat surrealistic; see, for instance, the first

stanza:

I have observed pink monks eating blue raisins.


And I have observed blue monks eating pink raisins.
Studiously have I observed.5o

The composer sets the poem in a rapid seven-eight

meter. The form of the song is ternary with a short rhythmic

introduction and coda.

The tonality for the first part, A1, is clearly F

major (see Example 18). As in the first song of this set,

there is almost no feeling of harmonic movement up to measure

7. The persistent use of the interval of the second seems

in keeping with the humor of the text. The ostinato-like

pattern in the bass of the piano part outlines the tonic

triad with added ninth:

56. Broder, 102.

57. Jose Garcia Villa, Have Come, Am Here (New York: Viking
Press, 1942), 62.

5 8 . Ibid., reproduced by permission of the Viking Press.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
60

Ex. 18 59

AUe^ro

I lavt ob icrved pink PlonKi C it.in j bUe r a t.S im .

vnp f l o w i n g
mm.

In measure 8 the pattern shifts to D major leading

to Part 2 of the ternary form. The B section, like the text

itself, is divided into two parts. The first is predominantly

in the key of D major. A shift is made to E flat major as

the second part begins (m. 17), passing then through B flat

major (m. 21), and on to G flat major (m. 25). At measure

30 the texture is thinned to the interval of an augmented

sixth (G^ to E ), which is then resolved to the tone F.

Part 3, A , begins in measure 31 as the tonic key

of F major is reestablished. The first sentence of Part 3

is somewhat altered, but in essence it is a repetition of

59. Copyright 1944, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
6l

Part 1. Part 3 is somewhat extended, as it includes the

summation words of the text: "My joy was to see the blue

and the pink counterpointing." The tonal center shifts back

to P major when these words of the text are introduced, and,

as in the previous song, the composer choses to end on what

can be regarded as the submediant triad rather than the

tonic. Although this last chord is incomplete, the use of

the pedal in the penultimate measure sustains the complete

major-minor seventh chord on D.

These two songs in Opus 18, "The Queen's Face on

the Summery Coin," and "Monks and Raisins," represent a

landmark in the career of Barber as a song writer. He seems

to cast off the chains of extreme conservatism by the

extraordinary complexity of interplay between the voice and

piano. He handles the unusual rhythmic patterns with

complete confidence, and the harmonic progressions are

"conditioned by the juxtaposition of freely flowing lines,

which themselves have the appearance of harmonic patterns."

Knoxville: Summer of 1915, Opus 24

This work was commissioned by the distinguished

60. Harry Dexter, "Samuel Barber and His Music," 344.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
62

American soprano of the Metropolitan Opera Company,


6l
Eleanor Steber, Completed in 19^7 it was first performed

by her with the Boston Symphony Orchestra under the direction


62
of Sergei Koussevitzky on April S, 19^8. The original score,

which calls for large orchestra, and a later version for

soprano and chamber orchestra can be bought. The latter

version is used in the formal analysis.

The prose text, which summons the thoughts and

feelings of a young child who is lying on the grass on a

summer evening surrounded by his loved ones, is taken from

the last part of an autobiographical essay by James Agee.

The part that is used in the composition is printed in full


63
in the score and on the jacket of the record.

In form this long, one-movement work (18 minutes)

approximates a five-part rondo with an introduction and


1 2 3
coda (Introduction A BA CA Coda). The short introductory

phrase (see Example 19) employs effective contrapuntal

61. Broder, 6 3 .

62. Ibid., 102.

6 3 . Recorded by Miss Steber and the Dumbarton Oaks Chamber


Orchestra, William Strickland conducting (Columbia
ML2174).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
fill
writing for the oboe, clarinet, and bassoon with the harp

softly sounding an open fifth on F sharp. The interval of a

seventh, which is a significant part of both the melodic and

harmonic elements, is emphasized in the oboe melody and

again by the first violin in measure 5 .

65
Ex. 19

The A1 section (m. 6-40) is a ternary form


2
(axba the lower case letters indicate the smaller

divisions within the larger A"*" section), in which a rocking

melody that serves as the theme is introduced by the voice

64. While the score indicates English horn, the printed


instrumental part is for oboe and sounds as written.

6 5 . Copyright 1949* 1952, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
64

(see Example 20) over a repeated melodic figure in the flute

and a chordal pattern in the harp. The tonal center through

out the first part of the ternary form (a1 , m. 6 -1 9 )

oscillates between F sharp minor and A major. While major

and minor triads and major seventh chords predominate,

several fourth chords and an occasional ninth chord are used.

66
Ex. 20
Aula.*ite u n Poco *noiio j.-.si
a - p
Voice

FI.

H*p.
Clr
1: i 1 . A - 1. i 11 1
. - . I 1.
vi*.
Vc.
W>~
PP

The general character of the music is unchanged in

the short b part (m. 20-27), but the tonal shift to B major

supports a formal division. The a2 part follows in measure

28 beginning on an F sharp major triad and leading to a

transitional phrase (m. 30-40) that ends on a B major triad

with an added second.

66. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
65

The quiet, rather nostalgic mood is suddenly dis

turbed as the section begins (m. 41-99). A short motive,

which especially emphasizes the intervals of a seventh and

a ninth, and the articulated sixteenth-note patterns that

follow in the winds and strings, suggest the "iron moan" of

a passing street car, the subject of this section.

Ex. 21

V/ltt.X dtv.

&SSVV

67. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
66

The pizzicato treatment of the sixteenth-note pattern in the

lew strings quoted above (m. 71-75) effectively points up the

words "the bleak, spark crackling and cursing . . . " sung in

staccato fashion.

The tonal center is unstable until measure 64. E

serves as the tonal center from measures 64 to 83 , passing

then through P and C and returning to A major as the

transitional phrase begins (m. 99-113).

As the strings sustain an A major seventh chord,

the short motive of the B section (see Example 21, m. 1),

which merges in character with the main melody of the A

sections because of the stress on the interval of a seventh,

is treated in imitation by the oboe, flute, clarinet, and

bassoon. The remaining part of the transitional phzase

(m. 103-114) consists of a series of arpeggiated seventh

chords treated by the voice and the orchestra.

The tranquility of the evening returns as the

abbreviated A2 section begins at measure 114. The altered A

melody appears in the voice and strings with the repeated

eighth-note pattern (see Example 20) being shared by the harp,

flute, and bassoon. A counter-melody, which was used in the

B section (m. 81-90), is treated in free imitation by the

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
67

strings from measure 124 to 127, leading to the beginning of

the C section at measure 128.

The C section (m. 128-217) divides itself into

three general areas. The first (m. 128-182), in which the

child contemplates the stars and then the various members of

his family, is centered in F major and F minor. The vocal

line is derived from the A melody, and the tranquil mood

of the preceding section is retained; in the second section

(m. 183-2 0 3 ), the intervals of a second, seventh, and ninth

are combined to intensify a climactic passage at the words

"By some chance, here they are, all on this earth. .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
68

Ex. 2268

- By some tk a n c t
strjlliVJWlbjfe4
w.

Hi

The concluding section (m. 202) begins with the counter

melody that was played by the bassoon in the introduction

(see Example 19) now treated in augmentation. The lucid

texture and the expressive vocal line vividly support the

fervent prayer of the text. It begins in D minor and moves

to F sharp minor as the transitional phrase begins in

measure 2 1 8 .

The transitional phrase (m. 218-230) carries out

the melodic line of the last part of C and also the intro

ductory counter-melody. The rocking melody of the A section

68. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
69

returns as the child is taken in and put to bed (A^, m. 231-

c. 2 5 6 ). The coda, or orchestral postlude, again recalls the

A theme and the arpeggiated A major seventh chord. The

movement comes to a quiet close on this chord with the major

seventh high in the flute.

In addition to the cohesive nature of the form, the

melodic material throughout is closely related by virtue of

its chordal construction (Barber's predilection for chordal

melodies has been pointed out earlier in this study). The

oscillation between F sharp minor and its related major tonic

A gives additional evidence that the composer considers either

chord as a substitute for the other.

Nuvoletta, Opus 25

Nuvoletta, written in 1947*^9 is a setting of a

passage taken from James Joyce's Finnegans Wake.?0 In this

gay waltz about "Nuvoletta in her light dress, spunn of

sisteen shimmers," Barber returns to the somewhat surrealistic

manner of the songs of Opus 18.

6 9 . Broder, 102.

70. James Joyce, "Finnegans Wake," in The Portable James


Joyce, 709-759.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
70

Along with some flowery comments, James Quillian

includes a statement about the structure of this song in his

article in Repertoire; he states:

. . . it is of a gossamer lightness, and as airy


as a spring breeze. A sort of rondo for voice and
piano, with a vocal cadenza wholly original, it
speeds along in a rapid three-eight rhythm. No
matter that the words are strange; the music is
positively captivating and a joy to p e r f o r m . 71

To characterize the form as a "sort of rondo" seems correct

enough. The pattern is as follows: Introduction, A1BA2CA3,

Coda. The unity inherent to the form itself is strengthened

by means of a simple motto presented first by the piano in

the introduction (see Example 23). It becomes an important

part of the principal sections (A, etc.), and appears in the

others as the work progresses. Outlining a minor seventh

chord, it exerts a noticeable influence on the chord

structures (see Example 23).

71. James Quillian, "The Songs of Samuel Barber," 21.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
71

Ex. 2372
AUe^tto

i 1
p L.H
F $

B Stnia p3le
z

The harmony is the result of the interaction of

the tertian and quartal systems, tonal clarity being insured

by means of strong melodic movement in the bass, which

emphasizes important diatonic scale degrees. This process

may be observed in the example below, where the principal

melodic material for the A sections appears in the vocal part

and the right hand of the piano (see Example 24).

72. Copyright 1942, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
72

Ex. 2 $ 3

vo-

.L

The key of E major is retained throughout the A

section. At the beginning of section B, which extends from

measure 5^ to approximately measure 76 or 77 , the tonality

shifts to A. In this section, which deals primarily with the

motto itself, the composer permits himself a kind of musical

literalness never before employed in his songs: at "She

sighed after herself as were she born to bride with Tristis

Trictior Tristissimus," Barber uses a quotation from Tristan

and Isolda (m. 71-75). The t? section that follows (m. 83-

86), is concluded by a chant-like setting of the words

"Prom Vallee Maraia to Grasy aplaina, dormi must echoj"

73. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
73

The C section, which is marked by a decided change

in tempo and style, extends from measure 104 to measure 120.

Of particular interest is the tone painting on the words:

"the tears of night began to fall, first by ones and twos,

then by threes and fours, at last by fives and sixes of

sevens"; the left hand of the piano part plays first a

quarter note, then -two eights, a triplet, four sixteenths,

a quintuplet, sextuplet, and septuplet, outlining a unison,

second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh respectively.

This is followed by a vocal cadenza that leads to an

abbreviated return of the A material (A^) in the tonic key

of E major.

The coda (m. 155 to the end) consists of material

derived mainly from the head of the A theme (see Example 24)

and the motto. The final chord is an open fifth (E-B) with

an added F sharp.

Melodies passageres, Opus 27

Melodies passagferes is a cycle of five songs on

poems written in French by Rainer Maria Rilke (1875-1926) . ^

74. E. M. Butler, Rainer Maria Rilke (Cambridge: University


Press, 1941), 13 and 3 8 1 .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
74

An English translation of each poem is included in the

Collected Songs of Barber.^ Completed in 1 9 5 1 this cycle

was first performed in a New York recital by Pierre Bernac,

baritone, and Francis Poulenc, composer and pianist, on

February 10, 1 9 5 2 . ^ Henry Cowell and Richard L. Goldman,

writing in the Musical Quarterly, made the following

comments about these songs:

Barber's songs seemed perfectly at home, or


completely naturalized, and it is with high
praise to write that on a program with songs
of French composers, including Poulenc himself,
they remained distinguished.

These five songs are comparatively short, and with

the exception of the fourth, no obvious tone painting is

employed. The distinguishing feature of each song lies above

all in its consistent delicacy and lack of pretentious

mannerism.

75. Samuel Barber, Collected Songs (New York: G. Schirmer,


Inc., 1955)*

76. Henry Cowell and Richard L. Goldman, "Current Chronicle,"


The Musical Quarterly XXXVIII (July 1952), 435-437.

77. Program Notes, Town Hall, February 10, 1952.

7 8 . Op. cit., 435 (Samuel Barber dedicated this cycle to


Francis Poulenc and Pierre Bemac).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
75

No. 1

"Puisque tout passe"

This short song (nineteen measures long) is

constructed in the form of an arch. Predominantly in the

key of B minor, it begins in the piano with the principal

figure of the piece, which is another instance of Barber's

predilection for melodies that outline chords of the seventh.

In the example below it will be seen that the vocal melody

begins as an augmentation of this figure:

Ex. 2579

noJr.to

Voic.*
ions ix

Us)
a
con Dtoate

79. Copyright 1952, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
76

The piano imitates the vocal line at the fifth above (m. 3),

while continuing to outline the principal figure in its

original form. The flat second degree is stressed in

measures 4 and 5.

The peak of the arch is reached in measure 9 on the

word "Chantons" with both forms of the principal figure

present. The composer seems to further capture the feeling

of resignation in "Puisque tout passe" as the tension de

creases from measure 11 to the end. The cadential extension

(m. 17 to the end) not only rounds out this song, but also

provides a subtle transitional phrase for the song that

follows. The final chord, an A major triad, serves as the

subdominant of the E minor tonality of the second song.

No. 2

"Un cygne"

o0
"The trembling image of happiness and doubt"

distilled in this poem is supported by Barber's musical

setting. A double musical sentence is set to each of the

two stanzas of the text, the concluding sentence being

somewhat altered.

80. This phrase is contained in the last stanza of the poem.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
77

Throughout the song the piano supplies a smoothly

flowing rhythmic background of arpeggiated ninth and eleventh

chords, primarily centered on E up to the last sentence of

the second stanza, where a shift is made to C sharp. The

principal melody is again an outgrowth of the introductory

measures:

81
Ex. 26

| l j McxWcato J =

* voice one a v&vtce $nr

h\o\to jto

The first sentence comes to a close in measure 9.

The motive that made up the head of the sentence (see

Example 26) is taken over by the piano in measure 10,

8l. Copyright 1952, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
78

providing a counter-melody to the second sentence in measure

11. At the close of the second sentence in measure 15, a

motive derived from measure 7 is used to extend the sub

dominant cadence.

With the exception of minor rhythmic alterations,

the first sentence of the second stanza (m. 17-22) is

identical with that of the other one. In measure 22 Barber

substitutes the submediant tonality of C sharp (Dorian) for

the tonic of E. (His substitution of the submediant triad

for the tonic has been pointed out before in the song "The

Queen's Face on a Summery Coin.") The motive that was used

in measures 15-16, now transposed to this new key (m. 22-2 3 ),

leads smoothly to the head motive of sentence one. A

comparison of measures 24-26 with measures 10-12 shows that

they are identical with the exception of key. The last few

notes of the antecedent phrase of this final sentence are

altered.

The coda (m. 32-36), recalling the head motive of

sentence one and the arpeggiated ninth chord on E, brings

the song to a quiet close.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
79

No. 3

"Tombeau dans un pare"

This song is based on two parallel sentences,

which are accompanied by a series of fourth-chords moving

in half notes. Barber again shows his imaginative powers in

musically conveying the meaning of the poem.

Each stanza of the text is set to one sentence,

whose first phrase is based on the Dorian scale.of D, the

second on the Dorian of G. The over-all tonality is D

minor. The melodic line for the second stanza in the

second sentence (m. 18-21) shows but slight rhythmic

changes. The block chords in this section are the same

as before, but somewhat enriched in measures 17-2 1 .

No. 4

"Le clocher chante"

In their article in The Musical Quarterly, Henry

Cowell and Richard L. Goldman predicted that this fourth song

would prove to be the one most frequently heard in Town Hall.

The musical setting brings forth the transitory joy that

resounds through the clangor of the bell tower. The

82. Henry Cowell and Richard L. Goldman, "Current Chronicle,"


436.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
80

fortissimo chord at the beginning of the song followed by the

rapid sixteenth-note patter provides a sharp but effective

contrast to the solemnity of the song that preceded it. This

one chord (a G minor triad with added fourth) along with the

rapid sixteenth-note figuration, which is somewhat modified

in subsequent appearances, is used throughout the song:

Ex. 2783

Novi Tropfo

This monothematic song divides itself into three

sections, each of which is set off by the same forzando chord.

As the pattern is quite obvious, a short diagram will

8 3 . Copyright 1952, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
81

suffice.2*

G minor

Section 1 Section 2 Section 3


(m. 1-5) (m. 6-11) (m. 12-25)
1 sentence An almost Augmentation
1st stanza literal re of consequent
petition of phrase of
section 1 original
2nd stanza. sentence is
followed by
transforma
tions of
original
sentence.
Pinal stanza
of the poem.

No. 5

"Depart"

Although the last song is only sixteen measures

long, the deep emotion that Rilke distilled in the few lines

of "Depart" is vividly captured. Its two eight-measure

sections are unfolded in the form of an arch, whose peak

is reached at measure 12.

As in the other songs of the cycle, the principal

material is set forth in the introductory measures. A

chromatic ostinato bass, which is later transferred to an

upper part, and an ever-present head motive from the main

84. The formal design suggests the bar form (aab).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
82

theme insure formal unity. The first twelve measures are

centered around D with the repeated note A serving as a

dominant pedal:

Ex. 28 85

itsyiuto
P sos
H otto Lento
wzm.
voice. flon 1 ni-e T T n & a u * it
M o tiv e

yj
F F - T -T
PSmW J o

con

At the peak of the arch (m. 12) the tonal center

moves down a third to B flat with the F major-minor seventh

chord acting as a sustained dominant. The ostinato bass is

transferred to the treble above this chord. The B natural

added to the final chord of the song seems to suggest the

"glimpse of hope" inherent in the poem.

8 5 . Copyright 1952, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
83

Hermit Songs, Opus 29

According to information contained in the Collected

Songs by Samuel Barber, the ten songs in this cycle were first

performed by Leontyne Price, soprano, with the composer at the

piano, at the Library of Congress, Washington, D. C., on


86
October 30, 1953. They are settings of poems translated

from the Irish texts of anonymous monks and scholars of the


ft7
eighth to thirteenth centuries.

A notational peculiarity of this set is the

absence of time signatures. In view, however, of the many

changes that would be required by conventional notation,

this omission tends to make the metrical reading less confus

ing for the singer. The composer is fastidious in his

observation of the pronunciation and duration of each

syllable or word, and there is never any question of the

proper rhythm.

86. Samuel Barber, Collected Songs, 7^.

87. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
84

No. 1

"At Saint Patrick's Purgatory"

Although this poem consists of eight stanzas,

Barber uses only the first, second, and eighth for his

setting. This is an open ternary form^ (A^BA2 ) in which

the pilgrimage in the poem is suggested by a steady

ostinato figure in the right hand of the accompaniment. The

over-all tonality is G sharp minor (A^ and A2 ) with the B

section in D minor. The melodic line in the vocal part

again shows evidence of Barber's partiality for chordal

outlines (see Example 29> m. 4).

8 3 . Translated by Sean O'Paolian, in The Silver Branch


(New York: The Viking Press, 1938),37-38.

84. Cedric Thrope Davie, Musical Structure And Design, 35.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
85

Ex. 29 90

JJJ A \ l e j r t t o (iii t t u i y v4tytliwi J .= 7 2

to Lock
T-J* TKr

Because the form presents no specific problems, the

diagram that follows will serve to summarize the presentation

of material.

B A
Meas. 1-26 26-30 31-41
G sharp minor D minor G sharp minor
(Material Block chords Abbreviated,
illustrated in with a sugges- otherwise un
Example 29). tion of the modified.
ostinato pat
tern from A
in the vocal
part.

90. Copyright 1952, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
86

No. 2

"Church Bell at Night"

As the hermit sings;

Sweet little bell, struck on a windy night,


I would liefer keep tryst with thee
Than be with a light and foolish woman.^

discordant overtones resound softly in the "Bell":

91. Translated by Howard Mumford Jones, in P. S. Allen, The


Romanesque Lyric (Chapel Hill: University of North
Carolina Press, 1928), 185. Poem reproduced by permis
sion of the publishers. (It is important to note that
the composer has changed the word order of the last line.
The translation reads: "Than be with a woman foolish
and light.")

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
87

Ex. 3092
M olto adagio J = H6

Wwtt i
T ^ 3
Sw t h t . t t e W l, S tr m k mi a w 'nd.y vii^rKt,

ino'
m

P S o n o rc
i
i L

|iH j]ri a

LABU Pad.
* f " i f PT #
fe d . P ed.
1
P e i. . W .

This short setting (six measures in all) consists of but one

sentence of music. It is apparent that the composer has

selected chords, many of which show quartal derivation,

primarily on the basis of their color. While the progressions

themselves are non-functional, the low pedal tones in the

bass (see Example 30) tend to center the tonality around P.

No. 3

"St. Ita's Vision"

As the score indicates, the composer is using

92. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
88

Chester Hallman1s translation of this eighth century poem hy

special permission. The musical setting of this song is

somewhat suggestive of a scene from an opera: a recitative

introduces an aria-like lullaby in which the saint dreams

that she is nursing the Infant Jesus at her breast.

The introductory recitative presents no specific

problems in form. The main body of the song, the "lullaby,"

begins in measure 5 and extends to the end (m. 44). Divided

into three sections, the second and third of which are

variations (modified strophes) of the first, it is centered

in F minor (Dorian) throughout, ending on an open cadence on

the dominant ninth. The chords are built in thirds with

added tones, and the progressions, with the exception of the

recitative, follow traditional, functional patterns. The

minor seventh chord, and, to a lesser degree, the major

seventh chord, are emphasized in the vocal part (see Example

31).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited w ithout permission.
89

93
Ex. 31
^JAvtiantft tw nutc
ittiw>) Y*!*1 f
twiF 'P ^ F=fl=f=| -p------ :
it
itmy- brt&it, mtwtwvrU $ true

---
-x-r-rf- F f f M

j. f -y-v..
fori-' r T ~ -~r"-
. i S -1

iNDKrt>
M tc X a l

The following diagram presents a formal analysis

of the entire song:

93- Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
90

Introduction Part 1 (a1 ) Part 2 (a2 ) Part 3 (a^)


Measures: 1-4 5-19 .20-29 30-34
Recitative
Style
"Lullaby"
minor throughout-
(m. 1), tonal Melody and Melodically Melody some
ly unstable,^ accompaniment fixed, but what modified,
leading to E illustrated abbreviated but' still a
(see Example variation of melodically
m. 2-4; 31). Ends on Sec. 1. Piano fixed varia
Closing on an dominant 7th accompaniment tion. A1
^
E mgjor triad (CM?). stresses a D theme in
D Phrygian augmentation
scale pattern (m. 38-44).
in sixteenth Ends on
notes. Cadence implied
on the dominant 9th
dominant. in F minor.
(CGD.)

No. 4

"The Heavenly Banquet"

The open cadence of the preceding song leads

directly to F major, the key of this, the fourth song. There

is a decided change in mood in "The Heavenly Banquet," in

which the host would like to have the men of heaven as his
94
guests and have them enjoy their drinking. This is a

closed ternary form (the first section (A1 ) ending on the


O
tonic note F) with the third section (A ) and the coda

being combined.

94. Translated by Sean O'Faolain, in The Silver Branch, 33.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
91

The cheerful mood expressed in the four stanzas of

this poem is vividly captured by a series of running eighth-

note patterns in the vocal line, consistently doubled by the

piano. The interval of a ninth is especially noticeable in

the chordal outlines of this song, being frequently brought

about by the superposition of two perfect fifths on a given

bass tone (CGD, FCG, etc.). The chord progressions themselves

follow traditional, functional patterns, with the A sections

being limited to the tonic and dominant harmonies.

The first section (A1 , m. 1-13), which includes the

first two stanzas of the poem, is a twelve-measure sentence

in which the antecedent and consequent phrases close with

authentic cadences in F major (m. 6, 13). Section two

(B, m. 14-35), includes the last two stanzas of the poem, and

is in the key of A flat major. The -cadential extension

(m. 27-31) seems to allow the "host" a brief moment for re

flecting upon his joyful desire to have a "great lake of beer

for the King of Kings." At the same time that the cadence is

being formed to conclude the B section (m. 35), a return is

made to the A material. The piano alone plays the concluding

Section A2 (m. 35-44), which serves as a coda, and is an

almost exact repetition of A 1 minus the first measure. The

abrupt ending in measure 44 seems appropriate to the carefree

mood of the poem.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
92

No. 5

"The Crucifixion"95

The lucid texture of thi3 monothematic song with

its emphasis on bare horizontal fourths and fifths paints a

vivid impression of the grief and pain in "The Crucifixion."

The principal motive is set forth in the Introductory

measures:

Ex. 3296
M oJrato

MI

Only twenty-eight measures long, it divides itself

into two sections, of which each contains one stanza of the

text (m. 3-15> 15-28). The tonality is generally centered

95. Translated by Howard Mumford Jones, in P. S, Allen, The


Romanesque Lyric, 188.

96. Copyright 1952, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
93

around A minor. The theme appears transposed up a fourth

as the second stanza begins, but on the third line of the text

"But sorer still to Him was the grief," it returns to the

original level. The introductory measures serve as a coda

(m. 26-2 8 ).

No. 6

"Sea Snatch"

The title of the poem is "The Wind," as it appears

in the translation by Kenneth Hurlston Jackson. ^ The

irregular groupings of an eighth-note ostinato-like pattern

culminating in an ascending spiral add reality to the fury

of the tempest at sea as expressed in the two short lines

of the poem:

97. Kenneth Hurlston Jackson, A Celtic Miscellany (Cambridge:


Harvard University Press, 1951), 13B"!

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
94

98
Ex. 33
/VWeg-0 c o n ^ u o c o

11

The musical setting consists of a ternary melody


1 2
(A BA ), of which each part is introduced by the ostinato-

like pattern; the first line of the poem is repeated for the

final section.

The chordal outlines and particularly the ascend

ing eighth-note patterns (m. J-9, 26-30) emphasize quartal

harmony. In the A sections (m. 1-9, 20-28) the only semblance

of chord movement is the oscillation between an open fifth

and fourth on C and B flat; in the B section (m. 10-19),

diminished fifths or augmented fourths are stressed in the

right hand of the piano.

2
In the final section, A , which in every way is an

almost literal repetition of A1, a short melisma is added to

98. Copyright 1952, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
95

the interjection "0" (m. 27-28) to lend further weight to


the feeling of despair.

No. 7

"Promiscuity"

The text is set to a melodic line limited to a

range of a diminished fourth. The entire song is constructed

upon the eight tones that are presented in the introduction:

Ex. 3499

Sojtenuto A lle g r o w*oJeraito J=IO0

Voice = i
I do net Knowwftudwiji t dan will aleeg,

Ram
i H i ' w

O,i

1
*
fcd.
P.dT

The technique suggests tone-row practice; the

eight tones could be thought of as a truncated row.

99. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
96

Considering the accompaniment and the vocal part, the song

consists of four nearly identical phrases alternating between

the voice and piano. It is interesting to note that the vocal

line, in addition to being limited in range, is composed of

but four of the eight tones.

The tonality is generally centered around P. The

intervals of the seventh and especially the diminished octave

in the piano in measure 9 (it is through the rearrangement

of the order of tones, beginning in measure 6, that this

interval is created) seem to have special connotations

peculiar to the text.

Although the order of tones is changed, the final

measure, a coda, recalls the introductory idea.

No. 8

"The Monk and His Cat"

The ostinato-like figuration (see Example 35)

that is used almost throughout this song seems in keeping

with the general air of contentment expressed by the

philosophical scholar in the poem. The structure is ternary


/ 1 2\
(A BA ), the B part being a small binary form. A one-measure

introduction leads to the beginning of A1 (m. 2-21), with

its use of hemiola in the vocal part:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
97

Ex. 35100

Moiftrito, flowing J--71

fOICt
-------------- "if
s i
P iivjo (
$

M . Pei.

This section, which is in the key of P major,

consists of a ternary melody (a^ba^)j each phrase is set

off by an ascending figure emphasizing minor seconds, which

seemingly suggests the monk's cat crawling softly over the

keys of the piano, and is also prominent in the coda. An

extension of the tonic cadence that concludes A"*" (m. 20-21)

leads to the second part, B, at measure 22.

In addition to the tonal shift to A minor, the

beginning of the a1 segment (m. 22-27) of the binary form

that makes up Part 2 is marked by rhythmically accented

chords, which point up the text and momentarily replace

100. Copyright 1952, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
98

the flowing eighth-note patterns in the bass of the piano.

The concluding part, b (m. 28-39), in which the ostinato

figuration is transferred to the treble of the piano, is in

the key of F sharp major ending on a half cadence on the

dominant seventh chord. This chord moves down a third to the

tonic triad of F major (m. 40) as Part 3 begins.

The first line of the poem, followed by the fragment

of it that appears in Example 35> is repeated in the final

section. Although minor changes result from the deletion of the

b part of the original ternary melody, A2 -is otherwise the

same as A1 . The coda (m. 50-52) brings the song to an effec

tive close on the complete tonic triad.

No. 9

"The Praises of God"

The score indicates that this poem, which was

translated by W. H. Auden, is used by special permission.

The imitative, staccato figuration in the piano (see Example

36), which introduces the A1 section of this ternary form


-| p
(A BA ) and continues throughout most of the song, provides

a striking rhythmic background for "The Praises of God" as

they are uttered in the poem.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
99

Ex. 36101

st&cc.

9 paJil
PLAIN

The melodic material that is used throughout the

song is contained in the following ternary melody that makes

up A1 (m. 4-12):

Ex. 37102

This section is centered in C major, but in the closing

measures the tonality shifts to A minor, cadencing, in

measure 10, on an E major chord that is extended through

measure 12.

101. Ibid.

102. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
100

The B section (m. 13-20), whose vocal line is

derived from the fragment of the ternary melody of the

first part (see Example 37), is tonally unstable. The D

sharp minor triad (m. 13) is never established as a key center,


/

and it is not until measure 21 that the tonality becomes

settled. The return of the original key of C major with

the melisma on the first syllable of the word "Laudation"

supports the structural division of the form attendant upon

the appearance of A^. The melodic line that is used for this

expressive vocal passage is derived from the b part of the

melody (see Example 37)* While sixteenth notes are used to

fill in the interval of the fourth as the syllable is

repeated, the outline of the melody remains the same.

A short coda (m. 26-31) based upon the rhythmic

background material brings the song to a close in C major.

No. 10

"The Desire for Hermitage"

The deeply felt desire of the hermit to live a life

of solitude before "the last pilgrimage to death" is vividly

expressed here by a restrained melodic line that winds

around a central tone. The melodic material for the entire

song, like that of "The Praises of God," is set forth in the

first section of this ternary form. The divergent nature of

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
101

the middle part (B) results from a textural change in the

accompaniment and a shifting of the tonal level rather than

in any new material.

The short introduction, which presents one of three

important motives of the song, establishes the tone G, whose

repetition provides a tonic pedal:

103
Ex. 38 (Note Motive l)

C&\ro e sest*nu.to

The melody of section A (m. 2-10) begins with Motive 1 and

is followed by Motive 2 in measures 5 and 6:

103. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
I( ''Eli? f Motive. 2

Motive 3 j which appears only in the piano part, is introduced

in measure 7:

The tonal center of this section is G with a decided emphasis

on the Phrygian scale. With the exception of measures 7 and

9, where bhe subdominant and subtonic chords are outlined,

there is no sense of harmonic progression in this section.

Motive 3 (m. 10) leads to the beginning of the middle section

(B) at measure 11.

104. Ibid.

105. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
103

Although the vocal line in the B part is more

expanded than that of A 1, it is nevertheless derived from

the preceding melody. This section (m. 13-25) is, however,

set off from h?- and A^ by its emphasis upon chordal movement

(quartal harmony is stressed), its shift in tonality, and by

the general change of mood that largely results from the more

elaborate treatment given to the piano. The tonal center is

unstable from measure 13 to 19, but in measure 20 the vocal

line and the accompanying figuration center around G sharp.

While all three motives appear in this section, Motive 1 is

especially emphasized; it appears in the vocal line (m. 19-20)

and in the piano part (m. 17-20). Motive 3 leads to the

transitional phrase (m. 26-2 8 ) played by the piano alone.

This cadenza-like passage, which leads to but yet


O
does not prepare the return of the A section, is based upon

the three motives. Motive 3 is used in the bass and treble

in measure 26 and is suggested in the ascending triplet

figures in the tenor line in measure 28; Motive 1 appears

in the bass in measure 28; Motive 2 is treated in canonic

imitation beginning in measure 28. This phrase ends on an

open fifth (G#-D^)10^ in the bass with repeated G sharps in

the treble. The original tonality of G minor is abruptly

106. G sharp is enharmonically A flat, and suggests the


Neapolitan relationship in G minor.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
104

2
restored when the G sharp slides down to G natural as A

begins (m. 2 9 ) .

O
Although minor embellishments are added, A*-

(m. 29-38) is an almost literal repetition of A1 . The song

ends quietly on a chord built up in fourths and fifths

(DGCGDGC), reaching the end of a cycle which, in the writer's

opinion, is one of the most important contributions to its

field written in our time.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
105

Chapter II

THE CHORAL MUSIC

Although Barber has written eight choral pieces,

only the first six will be included in the analysis. The

seventh choral work, Ad Bibinem cum me rogaret ad cenam,

a setting of a slightly altered verse by Venantius

Fortunatus, appeared only in a collection of articles and

music written for Carl Engel's sixtieth birthday, which was

published in a limited edition in 19*J-3 and is not for sale.1

An eighth composition, Prayers of Kierkegaard, a setting of

selected prayers of Soren Kierkegaard for chorus, soprano

solo, and orchestra, was not available until December of

1955 and falls beyond the time limits established for this

thesis. The full score and orchestra parts for the latter

work are available only on rental from the publisher.

Opus 8_

No. 1 "The Virgin Martyrs"


No. 2 "Let Down the Bars, 0 Death"

Written in 1935,2 "The Virgin Martyrs," for r

1. Nathan Broder, Samuel Barber (New York: G. Schirmer,


Inc., 195*0, 68.

2. Ibid., 100.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
106

womens voices, is a setting of a m o d e m English version of

an old Latin text. This version, after the Latin of

Sigebert of Gembloux, consists of three stanzas of four


3
lines each, of which none is rhymed. The song is made up

of two parallel sections, the second being merely a variant


4
of the first. The first and second stanzas are sung in the

first section, followed by the third stanza in the con

cluding section.

The sixteenth and dotted eighth-note rhythmic

division is stressed in the motto-like descending pattern

that is introduced by the sopranos in thirds and imitated

by the altos (see Example 41). This pattern, which later

appears also in mirror form, is used throughout most of the

song.

3. Helen Waddell, Mediaeval Latin Lyrics (New York: Richard


R. Smith, Inc., 1930), 159.

4. A modified strophic form.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
107

Ex, 41
AnAavAe, unpeto mono J-bb

P TKwt
AW1
Altoi,

J Jri^ :
Tke<*e.f"t tent __ x^*it
c o m * . ________

While the over-all key is C major, both the major

and minor modes of C are used. The chord structures are

predominantly triadic with only an occasional seventh chord

appearing. A slight degree of dissonance is achieved by

the use of nonrharmonic tones, particularly the 4-3 suspen

sion.

The first stanza of the text comes to a close in

measure 11 on a deceptive cadence in C major. Stretto

entries on the words "And other" (m. 11-13) that mark the

beginning of the second stanza lead to imitative treatment

of the descending pattern that began the song; it appears

in its original form and in mirror (m. 16-19, and 20).

The key of C begins to dissolve after measure sixteen, and,

5. Copyright 1939* by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
108

with the imitative treatment on the words "But their souls

and their faith weremaimed not," a momentary shift is made

to E flat Phrygian. The keyof C is restored (m. 26) follow

ing the pause that effectively sets off the last line of

the second stanza "Worthy now of God's company."

2
The second section(A , m. 28-53)> in which the

remaining, stanza of the textis extended by repeating the

words "gathering flowers," begins in the key of C major

with the motto-like pattern as before (see Example 4l).

Following imitative entries based on this pattern, the key

center moves to D minor (m 38-45). Except for the change

of key, measures 42-45 are identical with measures 21-2 5 .

The A minor triad serves as the pivot chord while the key

of C major is restored in the concluding section. The

suspension figuration is particularly noteworthy in the

closing measures: the bass suspension in measure 49 (2-3)

is followed by a 4-3 suspension in measure 51. The song


g
comes to a close with a half cadence on the dominant triad.

"Let Down the Bars, 0 Death," for four-part mixed

chorus, is a homophonic setting of a short poem by Emily

6. The repeated emphasis on the G major triad and the


melodic line too give a feeling of G Mixolydian as well
as C major.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
109

Dickinson. The poem, which consists of two stanzas of

four lines each, has an irregular rhythm and only the second
7
and fourth lines of the second stanza are rhymed. The

boldly simple but direct musical setting (see Example 42)


1 2
falls into an open ternary form (A BA ), in which the first

two lines of the first stanza of the poem are repeated in


2
the last section (A ).

8
Ex. 42

^w davA e. sitewut

Besides common triads, the augmented-major

seventh, major seventh, and diminished-minor seventh chords

are used. The A'*' section (m. 1-11) begins in G minor,

closing on a G minor triad. While the material that appears

in the B section (m. 12-21) is merely a continuation of A1,

7. The Complete Poems of Emily Dickinson (Boston: Little,


Brown, & Co., 1924), 201.

8. Copyright 1939* G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
110

some contrast is achieved, primarily through the shift in

tonality to the key of E, both the minor and major modes

being employed. It comes to a close in measure 20-21 on an


2
E major triad. A (m. 22-30), which is abbreviated, con

sists of an almost literal repetition of the first six

measures of the song (see Example 42). The song comes to

a close with a plagal cadence on a G major triad.

A Stopwatch and an Ordnance Map, Opus 15

g
This work, which was written in 1940, was

originally scored for a full chorus of men's voices and

three kettledrums. After it was published, the composer

added an optional accompaniment for four horns, three

trombones, and tuba.'1'0 While the score can be bought, the

kettledrum parts and the optional brass parts are available

only on rental from the publisher.

Stephen Spender's poem, which is dedicated to.

Samuel Barber, describes the death of a soldier in the


11
Spanish Civil War. There are three seven-line stanzas,

of which each begins with the words "A stopwatch and an

9. Broder, 101.

10. Ibid., 68.

11. Stephen Spender, Collected Poems (New York: Random


House, 1955), 8 7 .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Ill

ordnance map," and ends with "All under the olive trees."

The form of this choral piece, as In many vocal works, is

largely governed by the text. Like the poem, it is written

in three sections, the first line of each stanza being

introduced by the same motto:

n&vic<

_ J | J j

pp

A double refrain, of which a part appears in the following

example, is employed for the last line of each stanza:

12. Copyright 19^2, G. Schirmer, inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
112

Ex. 44

g
Ml uw.fcrtK*

Ml un.Jerlw

M \ UhJirnii

A short opening kettledrum solo leads to the

motto and the beginning of the first section (m. 4-17) in

the key of C minor. The second line of the first stanza,

"At five a man fell to the ground," is sung in chordal

style, leading to a descending scale pattern (m. 10) that

is treated in imitation. A short motive (m. 14) sung by

the first basses and imitated at the third below in the

second basses, leads to the first refrain.

The tonal center on C is retained throughout the

first refrain (m. 17-27), the major mode being emphasized.

13. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
113

In the first part of the refrain (m. 17-27), chordal style

is succeeded by imitative entries: in measure 21, the

second basses, acting as the leader (see Example 45), begin

the repetition of the refrain melody that ends on a C major

triad in measure 27 ; a short kettledrum solo leads to the

next section.

Following the statement of the motto in C minor,

the kettledrums begin a gllssando figuration that alternately

emphasizes the submediant, Neapolitan, and tonic harmonies

of B flat minor, the key of this section. The unison

passage (m. 35) that is sung by the first tenors and con

tinued by the basses from measure 39 to 41, is followed by

a motive treated in Imitation by the three upper voices over

a rhythmic eighth-note pedal in the kettledrums and second

basses; the submediant chord of B flat minor is stressed.

The climax of this section is reached (m. 45) on the words

"final loneliness" as a dominant organ point begins; mean

while, the second refrain enters in measure 49, being

stated this time, however, in the key of B flat minor.

Except for the change of key, this refrain is the same as

the first. The dominant chord, which has predominated

throughout this passage,-serves as the pivot between B flat

and C minor as the motto is restated.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
114

The chordal treatment of the second and third

lines of the third stanza is effectively contrasted with the

imitative treatment of the words "But another who lives on,":

Ex. 4514

r.i
TIT

Bvt -* wlo Uvt> n,

B .I

But AW . ottt-ftT wiltshxitl

B .H ML

K.D. 3E

The tonal center is somewhat uncertain from measure 74 to

80, hut at this point an augmented sixth chord is reached

(second half of the third beat of measure 80 F^A^CE^)

and resolved to the dominant of C major. The dominant

harmony is prolonged as a descending scale pattern

(m. 81-88)., which is an augmentation of the one that was

used in the first section (m. 10-1 3), leads to the third

refrain.

14. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
115

The first part of the final refrain (m. 88-92) is

a literal repetition of that which was used in section 1.

In the somewhat modified part that follows, the solo tenor

provides a dramatic melismatic passage, after which the

motto is once more recalled (m. 101-103). The composition

comes to a close with the kettledrums intoning a fragment

of the tail of the motto under the sustained C major triad

in the voices.

Reincarnations, Opus 16

No. 1 "Mary Haynes"


No. 2 "Anthony 0 Daly"
No. 3 "The Coolin"

Reincarnations is a setting for mixed voices of

three poems by James Stephens after the Irish of Antoine


3-5
O Raftery. The musical setting of the poem "Mary Haynes,"

which consists of two stanzas, falls into a bar form


12 1 2
(A A B ) . A lively main part (A'*, A ) is contrasted with a

more tranquil B section, in which the voices enter in

imitation and then join to recall the theme of the opening.

1
The A section begins on the leading tone seventh

15. James Stephens, Reincarnations (London: Macmillan & Co.,


19^8). The three poems that Barber has set are on
pages 3, 13* and l^j respectively.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
116

chord of C major (BDFA), resolving immediately to the

tonic. The main melody consists of an extended filled-in

chordal pattern (see Example 46) that is presented first in

chordal style; as the words "She is a rune" are repeated

several times, fragments of it are treated in stretto

imitation (m. 7 - H). Following chordal and imitative treat

ment of the last two lines of the first stanza, a cadence

in unison on the leading tone scale degree of C major is

reached.

16
Ex. 46
AMegro

Sop.
*
^ ft^J
^ n.._ Kyof t U Ju! (kt 11 J ft op lo o t I

AVTo &
3
op Tte. jTtnl. '* tU. Jttt Bp Low*.\

Tevtor m i
m m H V - H
s SK. is op tli* Ju.nl St. <* tVi 4 r t op U u t l -

B u si

C SKe. '*
p C e f H S -g i n
iKy op -fils Jutvtl S t* i* tu Jrt op. t,0 ? l _

16. Copyright 19^2, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
117

The pyramiding effect that results from the stretto-like

imitations of the spiralling figure (m. 16-18) sung to the

syllable "ah," dramatically marks off, and yet links the A1


2
section with its repetition A , which begins in measure 19.

Except for minor rhythmic changes, the first eleven


2 1
measures of A are identical with A ; the remainder (m. 30-37)

employs the melodic material of the main theme and modulates

to B flat, where it cadences in measure 35. The more languid

melody introduced by the tenors in measure 38, which is partly

derived from opening figure (see Example 46), marks the be

ginning of the B section (see Example 47); the first four

notes of the bass entry in measure 49 suggest an augmentation

and mirror of this melody. As the soprano voice enters with

the theme in measure 51> the tonal center reverts to C major,

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
118

17
Ex. 47

% L U

m s
>
'a?Lovil^t4 *'r y- - tV c w'w**i
- r* tin WiM.

a
Lowe. 1_ "l> in'i kit

the dominant (m. 51-52) in B flat major having become the

dominant of the subdominant in C major. The first part of


/ 1,
the melody of the opening section (A ) returns in measure

58 in augmentation. The harmonic wandering that follows in

the closing measures (m. 62-6 5 ), resulting from a series of

chords whose roots are a second and third apart, serves to

hold off the final cadence on the C major triad. The

mediant triad is reached on the fourth beat of measure 65

and serves as the penultimate chord. The cadence of a root-

descent of a third, E minor to C major, brings the song to

a satisfactory close in measure 66.

It is difficult to find a meaningful name for the

curious structure of the mournful "Anthony 0 Daly." It

17. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
119

is constructed entirely above or below the note E, which is

sounded in all but four measures. The whole work is based

on the material presented in the opening measures (see

Example 48), which, through repetition, lead to a frenetic

climax.

Ex. 4818

As the basses continually chant the name

"Anthony," the upper voices begin imitative treatment of

the theme. From measure 10 to 18, the tenor voices add to

the solemnness of the setting by repeating the line "For

O'Daly is dead" over the monotonous ostinato in the basses.

The tension slowly rises as the upper voices (m. 22-30)

make close stretto entries of the theme, and, as the

ostinato is transferred to the soprano and alto voices,

the tenors and basses take up the stretto imitation. The

18. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
120

final surge to the climatic point begins in measure 64.

Here the first three notes of the theme (see Example 48),

which are merely an ornamentation of the pitch E, are re

peated in unison by all the voices. The climax is reached

at measure 68 as the full choir sings, indeed almost shouts,

"Anthony!" The feeling of despair is intensified in the

last section (m. 74-88) where the chant-like plaint on the

repeated note E falling to C sharp is imitated at the

diminished fifth below. Only in this passage is the tone

E momentarily absent. On the final words of the text,

"There is nothing but grief," the sopranos and altos repeat

and sustain the tone E with an augmented fourth sounding

between the tenors and basses (m. 82-85). The song comes

to a close on an open fifth, E and B.

In the last of the set, "The Coolin," broken-

chord melodies in Siciliano-like rhythm lend warmth to the

tender love poem. The musical setting falls into a tri

partite division, all of whose material is based on that

which is presented in the first section. In addition to

common triads, extensive use is made of major seventh and

diminished-minor seventh chords, and, to a lesser degree,

the minor seventh chord; an occasional ninth chord appears.

The over-all tonal center is F major, the submediant harmony

(D minor) being frequently substituted for the tonic.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
121

The first half of the first section (A'1', in. 1-6),

which contains the principal sentence of the song, consists


1 2
of a small ternary phrase (a ba ) whose middle part is an

undulating section based on a F major seventh chord outline:

Ex. 49 19
,

com mol F mjo<* c L ri

wltk*c;luiJtrm V tk e tU .\A * tc # 6 t

The divided basses and tenors begin a modified repetition of

the sentence at measure 7* followed by imitative entries on

the b fragment, which serve as a transition to the middle

section (B) that follows in measure 14. The B section

(m. 14-31) divides Itself into two parts. In the first,

(m. 14-25), which develops chordal patterns derived from

the small b fragment of the main sentence, the apparent use

of the Locrian mode on C gives the effect of a shift in

tonality to D flat. A ninth chord built on the C major

triad (m. 21-23) leads to the submediant and tonic triads

19. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
122

of C (m. 24-25).

Although the melodic line that begins the con

cluding part of this section (m. 26-31) is not directly-

derived from the main melody, it is nevertheless somewhat

reminiscent of the a fragment (see Example 49). This part

also carries out the interchangeable mode concept as the

Dorian mode on C is employed (note the use of A natural in

measure 30 particularly). The B section comes to a close

in measure 31 on an E flat major seventh chord in second

inversion. The tone E flat is, however, treated as a D

sharp when it resolves to E, which is the fifth of the A

major triad that serves as the harmony for the beginning


2 2
of A . The final section (A , m. 32-38) is almost a
1
literal repetition of the first six measures of A ,

bringing the song to a close on an P major triad.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
123

Chapter III

THE PIANO MUSIC

Excursions, Opus 20

At the time of writing there are only two published

works originally written for piano solo. The first,

Excursions, Opus 20, written in 1944, and first performed in

19^5 ty Vladimir Horowitz,1 consists of four short pieces,

of which the composer himself says:

These are "Excursions" in small classical forms


into regional American idioms. Their rhythmic
characteristics, as well as their source in folk
material and their scoring, reminiscent of local
instruments, are easily recognized.

They are subtly refined treatments of four popular styles of

American music. In the first, whose formal pattern falls


1 2 ^
into a five-part rondo (A BA CA Coda), the composer provides

an imaginative treatment of the special type of piano blues

known as boogie-woogie.

Although there are many variables, the essential

part of any boogie-woogie is an ostinato bass figure,

usually sharply rhythmic (eight eighth notes to the

1. Harry Dexter, "Samuel Barber and His Music," Musical


Opinion 72 (March 19^9), 286.

2. Note in published score. Copyright, 19^5 by G.


Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
124

measure), against which the right hand rhapsodizes freely.

In liis article on "Jazz" in the Harvard Dictionary of Music,

Lloyd Hibberd includes several variable components:

. . . the sections usually [comprise] 12 measures


and the treatment often [is] contrapuntal (some
times in only two widely-spaced parts), with re
peated tones, broken-octave tremolos, and short
figures reiterated in great rhythmic variety.^

The ostinato bass figure as used here is as

follows:

4
Ex. 50

Q U p o c o a lW g r r o )-
l

-r

In the A parts of the rondo design the above pattern is

repeated on the tone C; in the B and C sections it appears

on the subdominant tone P and the dominant tone G

3. Lloyd Hibberd, "Jazz," in the Harvard Dictionary of


Music, ed. by Willi Apel (Cambridge, Mass: HarvarcT
University Press, 1946), 378.

4. Copyright 1945, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
125

respectively. Except for the A^ and C parts, the sections

comprise twelve measures. It is possible to identify two

reiterated patterns that constitute the essential material


1 2
of the right hand of the A , B, A , and C parts. The first

begins with repeated tones followed by triadic and seventh

chord outlines:

5
Ex. 51 Pattern 1

Although the second pattern continues to outline triads and

seventh chords, the returning tone aspect assumes an

important role:

5. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
126

Ex. 52 Pattern 2
ywj

The material used in the right hand of the A part

(m. 90-106) consists of syncopated block chords, neither

pattern appearing. The Coda (m. 107-113) is a repetition

of measures 2 and 3 (see Example 50). The movement may be

diagrammed as follows:

A B A
m. 1-37 m. 38-55 m. 56-65
Ostinato bass on C- + p --------- ------ -> C
Two sections Two eight-measure One eight-measure
(m. 1-10, 11-18), sections. Emphasis phrase, Pattern
Pattern 1 In right on Pattern 2 leading 1 (somewhat
hand followed by to transitional modified) leading
linking passage phrase (m. 53-55) to transitional
leading to section consisting of an phrase (m. 63-6 5 )
2 (m. 25-37); arpeggiated 4th chord made up of Figure
Pattern 1, a minor and repeated tones 1.
third higher (note on E.
cross relationship
or split 5th G
flat against G
natural, m. 29-32).
Pattern 2 introduced
in measure 33.

6. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
127

C Coda
Ostinato bass on G -------- * C ------------------ * c
m. 66-89 m. 90-106 m. 107-113
Patterns 1 and 2 Syncopated block Repetition of
developed. No chords in right hand. measures 2 and
marked sectional Cross relation of G 3. Ends on the
divisions; mea- flat against G note C.
sures 8 5 -90 serve natural (mt 92-9 6 );
as a^transition tonic major and minor
to A . and subdominant triads.

The second in this set, a rich and elegant blues,

is divided into four twelve-measure sections, each being

improvisatory in nature. The unvarying harmony of each

a c t i o n is limited to the tonic and dominant chords of C

major with a secondary dominant of the dominant being added

in the concluding section (m. 41-42). To this simple chord

structure the composer adds the lowered seventh (B flat =

A sharp,) or "blue" note, both melodically and harmonically.

Of special harmonic Interest is the simultaneous use of the

"blue" note and the leading tone scale degree. This pro

cedure can be observed in the opening measures where the

dominant seventh chord without the root contains both an A

sharp (B flat) and a B natural;

7. Lloyd Hibberd, "Jazz," in the Harvard Dictionary of Music,


3 76 . Also refer to Winthrop Sargeant, Jazz; Hot ancT
Hybrid (New York: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1946), 153, 195.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
128

8
Ex. 53

I * slow WWs tempo J=<)0

Because of the simplicity and repetition of the

same material, it is not necessary to give a detailed dis

cussion of each section. By way of conclusion, it will be

noted that the first and second sections are extended one

measure by repetition and extension of the cadence chord

(m. 12-13, 25-26).

The piquant, fluid effect that is achieved by the

unusual rhythmic organization in a set of variations on a

folk-like melody, makes the third piece in this group

especially interesting. The regular eight-measure melody

divides itself into two equal phrases:

8. Copyright, 19^5, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
129

Ex. 54' Antecedent Phrase

A M t y r etta J-60 ^ rj

3E
f tcf r
P W ^ a -ti

3
CoVI edal

Ex. 55 Consequent Phrase

eon X l h a o

Smyr legato

9. Ibid.

10. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
130

The following diagram will provide a synopsis of the

variations:

m. 1-8 9^16 17-24 25-32


t------------------ G Majorthroughout------- -----
Statement of Var. 1 Var. 2 Var. 3
theme. Note Literal Antecedent Consequent
unusual rhythmic repetition of phrase an phrase only;
organization antecedent octave higher; rhythmic
(See Example 54 phrase; rhyth rhythmic variations:
and 55). mic variation variation of
of consequent consequent n rf]
phrase phrase
etc. Stress etc. Added
on triads 2nds and 4ths
with added again used.
2nds and 4ths.

m. 33-40 41-48 49-56 57-64 65-72


Var. 4 Var. 5 Var. 6 Var. 7 Var. 8
Literal re Consequent Complete Consequent or Coda
statement phrase only, melody phrase Literal
of antece melody in treated in only. restate
dent phrase; tenor voice block Rhythmic ment of
consequent (m. 41-44) chords in setting ante
phrase eighth-notes both hands similar cedent
transferred against with em to phrase
to bass part sixteenth phasis on original in
with melodic note pat septuplet statement. original
and rhythmic terns; rhythmic Phrase rhythmic
variation in melody in division appears an dress.
treble. treble (see Example octave Last
(m. 45-48) 55). higher four
sixteenth from measures
note pat measure consist
terns 61-64. of a
continue. modified
repeti
tion of
ante
cedent
phrase.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
131

The last movement, an Allegro molto, is a

joyous barn dance in which the village fiddler and

accordion player can be recognized. The structural design,


1 2
which falls into a tripartite pattern (A BA ), may be termed

a "frame form"; the main body of the movement (B) is pre

ceded and followed by the extremely short A sections


11
(m. 1-13, 57-70). It is entirely in the key of P major,

the chords being limited for the most part to the tonic and

subdominant triads; added tones are frequently used. The

principal melodic material that is used throughout is pre

sented in A1 ;

12
Ex. 56

^ AW tgro vuYto J138


-

Some contrast is achieved in the B section (m. 14-56)

through mutations of the original melodic material and

11. Professor Thomas S. Turner suggested the term "frame


form" to the writer.

12. Copyright, 1945, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
132

the texture. It will be seen that the melodic material in

the left hand that begins the B section is closely related


1
to that of A , the accompaniment being varied:

Ex. 57

Following repetition and development of this

material with particular emphasis on the repeated note

figure of the A"*" melody (see Example 56 , measure 3), the

first eight measures that began the B section are repeated

(m. 41-48). A transitional phrase (m. 49-56) then leads to


1 2
an almost literal repetition of A (A', m. 57-70). The

movement comes to an effective close with an arpeggiated

ninth chord on F.

Sonata for Piano. Opus 26

On September 2 3 , 1947, Irving Berlin and Richard

Rogers publicly announced that they had commissioned

13. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
133

Samuel Barber to write a piano sonata. The commission,

which was given on the recommendation of the League of

Composers, was to honor the League's twenty-fifth anniver-


14
sary in 1950. The sonata was completed two years later

and first performed on December 9, 1949, by Vladimir


15
Horowitz in Havana, Cuba. ^ Mr. Horowitz played the sonata
16
on January 4, 1950 for an invited audience in the Trustee's

Room of G. Schirmer, Inc., and after introducing it in

several cities, he gave its first New York public performance

in Carnegie Hall on the evening of January 23, 1950.

The work is emotionally more profound than many of

Barber's early works and technically farther advanced. It

is highly praised by Hans Tischler:

Brilliant and difficult though it is, this is no


mere display piece. It stands head and shoulders
above any other sonata written by an American
composer in the past thirty years, and is worthy
of taking a place alongside the great works of its
category by reason of its Beethovenian concentra
tion, seriousness, and mastery.!'

14. New York Times (September 24, 1947).

15. Nathan Broder, Samuel Barber (New York: G. Schirmer,


Inc., 1954), 102.

16. New York Herald Tribune (January 5, 1950).

17. Hans Tischler, "Barber's Piano Sonata, Op. 26," in


Music and Letters XXXIII (October 1952), 352.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
134

It is the first work of Barber's in which twelve-

tone series are worked into the texture. Most of them result

from the repetition of groups of three or six-note patterns,

fourth chords and augmented triads being prominent in most.

The six-note patterns and rhythmic-meIodic figures are often

sequenced. A note of the series is frequently repeated

rather than disturb the motive; a note may be omitted for

pianistic reasons; or, the succession of notes that go to

make up a series may be changed to allow for alteration of

the motive during the course of its sequencing. Barber uses

the twelve-tone series as one among many compositional

techniques, rather than as the sole agent for generating his

musical formations.

While the texture is almost entirely chromatic and

dissonant, the themes are sharply defined and stand out

clearly. The formal designs in this four-movement sonata

are more or less traditional and they are based on a key

center E flat minor. The opening allegro is in sonata

form; its principal theme, with its characteristic

chromaticism, sets the tone for much of the work.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
The key of E flat minor is established by

repetition and rhythmic stress of the tonic and submediant

tones; the flat second degree (Phrygian) is also emphasized

in measures 3 and 4. A repetition of the theme as it appears

above leads to the transitional section beginning at measure

9.

The transitional section (m. 9-22) begins with

18. Copyright, 1950, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited w ithout permission.
136

imitative entries of a figure, which is derived from the head

of the principal theme, accompanied by various three and six-

note patterns. The following example will show the transi

tional figure and the first six-note pattern with its

internal sequencing:

19
Ex. 59

Stretto imitation of the descending chromatic line that

makes up the tail of the principal theme is suggested as the

third entry of the transitional figure begins (m. 12). A

short three-note figure, which becomes an important part of

the closing theme area, appears in measures 17 and 1 8 :

19. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
20
Ex. 60 Figure 1

This leads to a B natural pedal in measure 19 (enharmonically

the submediant scale tone of E flat minor), and, in measures

20 and 21, a new series beginning with the tone B natural is

set up. While the order of tones is changed in measure 22,

B natural is retained as the starting tone and the stress on

the augmented triad pattern continues in the series that is

used to accompany the second theme beginning in measure 23

(see Example 6l). The repetition of the series starting on

B natural establishes the submediant tonality of C flat

(B natural = C flat).The contrasting nature of the second

theme results from its lack of chromaticism and its smoothly

flowing rhythm:

20. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
138

21
Ex. 61

W p lp(tMI\W

The tall of the second theme consists of a twelve-note series

(see Example above, m. 25-26) emphasizing major triad figures

against both the augmented and major triad patterns in the

accompanying series. Imitative entries of a figure (see

Example 62), which is derived from both the head of the

second theme and the head motive of the accompanying voice

to the principal theme (see Example 58, m. 1, left hand),

lead to a fragmentary appearance of the second theme that is

spun out into two twelve-note patterns, which momentarily

stress E flat (m. 32-33)* reverting thento B natural from

measures 3^ to 3 8 .

21. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
139

pp
Ex. 62** Figure 2

Three short figures and a fragment of the

principal theme make up the material for the closing theme

area (m. 39-50)* Figures 1 and 2 are shown in Examples 60

and b2 respectively: Figure 3* which appears in the closing

measures of the second theme area (m. 35-36), makes use of

repeated notes:

Ex. 632^ Figure 3

iidja 5
!Hr
L
Figure 3 is present throughout the closing area; it is the

main motive from measures 39 to 42; next, in measures 43

and 44, Figures 3 and 1 provide an antiphonal effect;

finally, Figure 3> Figure 2 and a fragment of the principal

22. Ibid.

23. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
140

theme conclude the closing area (m. 45-50). The closing

theme area is centered in the subdominant key of A flat

throughout.

The preceding material, except for Figure 1, is

worked out in the development section (m. 51-109). The first

section (m. 51-70) deals almost exclusively with the

principal thematic material. Beginning in the tonic key of

E flat, it then passes through the submediant and subdominant

areas. The second section (m. 7 1 -8 9 ) consists principally

of Figure 3 and. Figure 2, and is centered in C minor. The

final section (m. 90-109) is made up of a six-note ostinato

pattern against which fragments of the second theme are

heard. A mediant prolongation is felt from measures 102 to

109 ending in a powerful crescendo leading to the climax of

the movement, the entrance of the recapitulation.

The recapitulation section (m. 110-148), although

somewhat abbreviated, follows a regular scheme. It may be

diagrammed as follows:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
141

Recapitulation Section

m. 110-117 m. 118-128 m. 129-140 m. 141-148


Almost Transitional Second theme Closing theme
literal re section is area. Abbre area. Abbreviated,
statement slightly viated, but but otherwise
of princi abbreviated, otherwise an almost a literal
pal theme but other almost literal restatement
in E flat wise a restatement. centered in C
minor, literal re Centered in D flat.
leading statement. (leading tone
to transi degree of E
tional flat minor)
section. from measures
129 to 133.
Figure 2
(m. 134-135)
momentarily
stresses E
flat; moving
then to the
mediant
tonality of
G flat.

The coda (m. 149-166) is made up of all three

figures and the principal theme. It is in the key of E flat

minor throughout.

The second movement, a light, sardonic scherzo, is,

as Nathan Broder states: "... perhaps a bit light in

weight for its strong neighbors, but it serves its purpose,


24
which is to relieve the tension for a moment." The move-
1 O -3
ment, which is a sort of rondo (A Transition BA CA Coda)

24. Broder, 70.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
142

does not contain a single complete series though many related

patterns are used. Three short melodic patterns make up the

principal material for the entire movement; the first two are
1
contained in the A section:

25
Ex. 64
AHtgro v iv e J.ziSi

p IjMWIII1

26 a V)
Ex. 65 Pattern 2 Pattern 2

2 5 . Copyright, 1950* G. Schirmer.

26. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
143

a four-note ascending pattern begins the transitional

passage:

27
Ex. 66

The lucid texture of the main sections results from the

lithe, rhythmic flow of two independent lines. A degree of

contrast is achieved in the alternate sections by shifts in

tonality, meter, and chordal outlines. Like the first move

ment, the key centers are established by repetition and

rhythmic stress of a tone or chordal pattern. The tonality

is unstable in the transitional section and in section C,

where the augmented fourth and diminished fifth intervals

are employed. The following diagram will summarize the

material:

27. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
144
1
A Transition B
m. 1-26 m. 27-48 m. 49-80 m. 81-101
Key of G major Begins with Based on Key of G
with parallel four-note patterns 2 Literal
modes of G be pattern follow and 2 , 2 repetition
ing used, two- ed by Patterns predominating. of A up to
voice writing 2a and 2b, 2b C major-minor. measure 95 >
throughout. predominating 49-66; A minor- the 3rd
Closed section See Example 67 -70; measure of
ending on G 0 5 ). Passes Passes A being
major triad through Bb through E repeated
outline. major, B minor, minor lead in remain
A minor, and ing to a ing part.
B. kind of
dominant
prolongation
in G (m. 75-
80 ).

3
c A Coda
m. 102-133 m. 139-151 m. 152-165
Based on Key of G Begins with
Patterns 2a and Abbreviated, four-note
2 , 2 pre literal re pattern of
dominating . turn of A ; transition
Tonally un closed al section
stable: begins section end transposed
in G, moving ing on G down a
quickly major triad minor 3rd;
through E, B outline. Patterns 2a
and B ; tonal and 2
center (m. employed
122-139). from
measures
156 to I65
over tonic
pedal.
Ends on G
major
triad.

Barber's intrinsically musical approach to the use

of the twelve-tone series again comes forth in the third

movement, a dirge, Adagio mesto. There is not one

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
145

twelve-tone series but several, employed mostly as accompani

ment material. In several instances the series is only

partially presented, and, at other times the composer does

not hesitate to enrich chords from a series with notes not

belonging to it. Hans Tischler observes that the series are


28
employed in the manner of a passacaglia. The following

quotation from his article in Music and Letters carries out

his observation:

The employment of the twelve-note rows in this


movement is quite original and a real contri
bution to contemporary technique. It re-inter-
prets the archaic passacaglia in twentieth-
century terms, and adds to it recitative-like
melodic material reminiscent of Bloch's chant
like lines. 9

1 p
The movement is in three-part form (A BA ), the

principal melodic material of the A sections being framed

by the short introductory passage (see Example 6 7 ), which

is elaborated in subsequent appearances. The over-all key

is B minor with the B section firmly rooted in C major.

The two-measure introductory passage, in which the first

series is presented in a vertical fashion, leads to the

principal theme of the Adagio over the passacaglia-like

28. Hans Tischler, "Barber's Piano Sonata," 353*

29. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
146

accompaniment made up of the first series. The following

example shows the first series (m. 1 and 3-4, left hand),

the theme (m. 3-4, right hand), and the second series

(m. 5-6, left hand):

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
147

30
Ex. 67

A i a e i c v w ttto ^ - t . 4 8

-*
5Tit II

a_
___
_____
___
___
__
l.bfff f ffrfip -f
BW 1.
1
1
i
%
%
\ p
P bf-
_.............vjp: A tiiji.
...... .... <>

w 1
it J J i fu.

The principal theme is derived in part from the main melody

of the rondo of the second movement. The encircled tones in

30. Copyright, 1950, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
148

measure 3 of the example above are identical with those that

make up a part of the theme in the previous movement (see

Example 64). The theme is alternately shared by the treble

and a middle voice from measure 7 to 10 over a strong

harmonic bass line stressing the leading tone and tonic

scale degrees of B minor. Following an elaboration of the

introductory passage in measures 11, 12 and 13 (m. 1 -2 and

m. 11-12-13 frame the A section), a short linking measure

leads to the B section and the tonal shift to C.

While the melodic material that begins the B

section is outwardly new in appearance, it is nevertheless

a natural outgrowth of the principal theme of the section.

The following example shows the beginning of this section

and the new series starting on C:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
149

At the beginning of the climax of the movement in measure 20,

a repeated-note figure derived from the closing theme of the

first movement (see Example 6 3 ) is presented:

.32
Ex. 69'
r* 5

i i

The first series returns at measure 24 as the tonality re

verts to B minor. Prom measure 24 to 27, the introductory

31. Ibid.

32. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
150

passage (see Example 6 7 , m. 1-2), now somewhat extended and

presented over a leading tone pedal point in B minor, serves

as a transitional phrase leading to the concluding section


n>
(A ) that "begins in measure 28.

A literal restatement of the principal theme in B

minor occurs from measure 28 to 32. A final reference is

made to the repeated-note figure (m. 34) and the head of the

principal theme (m. 3 6 ) over a tonic pedal. The introductory

passage is recalled at measure 36 and the movement comes to

a quiet close on a B minor triad.

The finale is a brilliant toccata-like fugue.

Hans Tischler makes the following statements about the sub

ject:

The subject is similar to old Italian fugue


subjects in that it is soon shown to be composed
of several sections; but, unlike those, Barber's
subject does not differentiate between the head
motive and the remainder by giving long notes to
the former and to the latter short o n e s . 33

The fugue subject follows:

33. Hans Tischler, "Barber's Piano Sonata," 353.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited w ithout permission.
151

34
Ex. 70

to con s p m

The two segments of the subject are treated as separate

entities for long portions of the movement, turning it

almost into a double fugue.

Structually, the fugue is divided into an ex

position and five development sections separated by episodes

and followed by a coda.

The exposition section (m. 1-13), which is in the

tonic key of E flat minor, begins with the subject stated

alone followed by a real answer at the fourth below beginning

in measure 4. The motive that appears as the counterpoint

of the subject derives from the principal theme of the first

movement (see Example 58). The subject and countersubject

are inverted at the octave during the third entry and the

34. Copyright 1950, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
152

latter is partially stated as the fourth entry begins.

In measure 13 the exposition section comes to a close on an

implied authentic cadence in E flat minor. The following

diagram will provide a synoposis of the remaining sections:

35. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
153

Episode 1 Development Episode 2 Development


Section 1 Section 2
m. 14-17 m. 17-2? m. 28-37 m. 37-52
Counter Statement of Counter- Segment B over
subject spins Segment A^ subject pedal on A
out into folk^ counter material and (m. 37-40)
like melody.3 subject above fragment of leads to aug
Tonal move (m. 17-18) Segment B mentation and
ment: followed by (m. 28-33), - mirror of Seg
E minor - F complete tonally un ment A over E
parallel subject certain pedal
modes on P against a (A ?). Frag (m. 41-46);
used. stretto of ment of Seg Segment B
Segment A ment A (m. 33) (m. 48-52).
and counter in B*3 minor Tonal move
subject leads to ment: D minor
material. cadenza-like (m. 37-^0); A
Tonal move passage over minor
ment: P - C extended pedal (m. 41-52).
as complete on A (m. 35-37).
subject be
gins; D*3
(m. 23-26).

36. Broder, 72. The material has "American folk-dance


flavor."

37* Segment A and Segment B refer to the fugue subject


(see Example 70).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
154

Episode 3 Development Episode 4 Development


Section 3 Section 4
m. 53-64 m. 65-81 m. 82-90 m. 91-95
Counter- Stretto, frag Counter E flat minor
subject ment of Segment subject extended
material over A, second voice and dominant
pedal on C in augmentation fragment pedal.
leads to the (m. 6 5 ), followed of Segment Complete
key of E major by Segment B A. Tonally statement
and the (m. 67-70); unstable, of subjects,
appearance stretto of leading to Segments
of folk-like Segment A dominant , A and B
melody used (m. 71-72). pedal of E treated in
in Episode 1 Centered in C minor stretto.
(m. 56-64) (m. 65-72). (m. 8 9 ).
note augmentation Stretto, Segment
of melody in left A in double
hand (m. 56-5 9 ). augmentation and
later mirror
(m. 73-78).
Fragment of
Segment A leads
to Episode 4.
Tonally unstable
(m. 73-81).

Episode 5 Development Coda


Section 5
m. 96-99 m. 100-108 m. 109-148
(J1- 120)
E flat minor,
extended Stretto Hocket-like
dominant entries of treatment of
pedal. Segment A in countersubject
Counter augmentation. material followed
subject by Segment A at
material measure 136
ending in where polyharmony
cadenza-like is suggested
passage. E against E .
Arpeggiated Movement ends
.as o;
on
augmented 6th open fifth Eb-Bb .
chord , _ ,

&
to E
99-P A^C
gesolves

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
155

Barber gives his sonata unity by the transfer of

motives from the preceding movements and by returning in the

finale to the tonality of the opening movement. It is fitting

to conclude this discussion with Hans Tischler's excellent

summary of the work:

The fusion of contemporary technique with that of


the past three centuries of twelve-note
technique, contemporary harmonic materials,
sonata form, passacaglia and fugue this
thoroughly satisfying fusion stamps Barber's
Piano Sonata Op. 26 as a classic of our times.

3 8 . Hans Tischler, "Barber's Piano Sonata," 35^*

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
156

Chapter IV

THE CHAMBER MUSIC

Serenade for String Quartet or String Orchestra, Opus 1_

The Serenade for String Quartet or String

Orchestra, Opus 1, was written in 1929 when Barber was a


1
student at the Curtis Institute. According to Harry Dexter,

this work is "the sort of thing which many composers, in

many lands, were turning out at that time, and it is no


2
better and no worse." He goes on to say that while the

serenade bears the mark of an immature composer, it does

nevertheless give promise of things to come.

This work, as well as several other compositions

of the early period, looks back to uhe late romantic era

for its inspiration. The melodic writing is interesting,

the texture is varied, and the piece achieves its modest

aims. Nathan Broder partially describes the harmonic

language by saying that many of the chord progressions re-


3
mind him of Hugo Wolf. In line with this statement, the

1. Nathan Broder, Samuel Barber (New York: G. Schirmer, Inc.,


195^0, 100.

2. Harry Dexter, "Samuel Barber and His Music," Musical


Opinion 72 (April 19^9), 3^3.

3. Broder, 73.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
157

writer believes that the harmonic writing resembles that in

Hugo Wolf's Italian Serenade for string quartet.

All three movements are short. The first begins

with a languid introduction in 4/2 time whose material forms

the basis of the movement a sonata-allegro construction

without a development section (Introduction; A1}}1 Bridge

A^B2 Coda).

The augmented sixth chord and especially the

diminished seventh chord are emphasized in the introduction,

in which the over-all key of A minor is established. As it

comes to a close (m. 1 5 ) with a half cadence on the dominant,

the first violin, over a rhythmic accompaniment in the other

strings, introduces the principal theme (A1 ) of the Allegro

con spirito beginning in measure lo:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Extending from measure 16 to measure 31, it consists of one

complete sentence ending on the dominant seventh of A minor

in measure 31. A short linking phrase (m. 32) leads to

another statement of the antecedent phrase of the theme

(m. 33). This is followed by a four-note figure (m. 41) in

stretto imitation introducing a short bridge passage which

culminates, in measure 49, on a diminished seventh chord

that is resolved to the tonic of C major, the key of the

subordinate area.

The widely-spaced, expressive second theme is in

troduced by the viola over a sustained C pedal in the cello

and double bass and a syncopated major 3rd (C-E) in the


1
second violin. This theme, B , begins in measure 50:

4. Copyright, 19^2, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
159

Ex. 735

W'in.l |
IS
i n i < J C I& - 4 n t t |"
r t f Eq f t n I f f - - f
p t |

s
P.. _ --
* 7 ""'
! ! iO/ T . _ 1-p... .*
h = = = E = t i U T. :
vwr esp w v 10

cc\U

= =

As the first violin begins a consequent phrase, the mode

changes to minor (see Example 73* measure 54). The theme

closes in measure 58 with an altered dominant (GBD P) to

tonic cadence as the mode reverts to major. The cello and

double bass (5 8 ), with a modified version of a part of this

theme, begin a four-measure phrase extension that leads to

the bridge passage (m. 64).

The key of C is retained for the first part of the

bridge section; it begins to dissolve in measure 66 as the

second violin introduces a three-note descending figure,

which is reminiscent of the head of the second theme. The

5. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
160

passage comes to a close in measure 67 on an implied dominant

triad in A minor.

2
The A section starts in measure 67 with the second

violin presenting a literal restatement of the principal

theme in A minor (m. 67-78). The linking passage leading to


p
the restatement of the second theme (B ) is limited to four

descending quarter notes beginning with the last quarter note

in measure 7 8 .

2
The second theme (B ), which begins in measure 79*

is neither complete nor exact in this appearance. Although

the mode shifts to A major as this fragment begins, A minor

is quickly restored with the appearance of the C naturals in

measure 80.

A short coda made up of material from the linking

passage used from measure 41 to 48 brings the movement to a

close in A minor.

The second movement, a lyrical Andante, is a two-

part form, of which each part is a small open binary form in

itself.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
161

Part I Part II

1 1 2 2
Intro. a b a modified b Coda

g^m: i * V7 VI - > i i V VI i > i

Calling for muted strings, it begins with a short introduction

played by the second violin and viola. The a1 melody of

Part I, angular in nature and covering a range of two octaves,

is introduced by the first violin in measure 2:

Ex. 746

The a segment comes to a close in measure 14 on the

dominant seventh of G sharp minor. A deceptive resolution

of this chord to the submediant triad marks the beginning of


1 / i.
the b segment of Part I (m. 14).

Although the key of G sharp minor is never com

pletely dissolved throughout this movement, the contra

puntal lines in the first four measures of the b segments of each

6. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
162

part (in. 14-24, 37-47) tend to obscure the tonality. The

melody of the b 1 segment, also angular in nature, is

characterized by duple rhythmic divisions:

Ex. 75?

Only the first three and one-half measures of the


1
a melody of Part I are literally restated as Part II begins
2
(a , m. 26), the altered consequent phrase acting as a bridge
2
to the second segment of Part II (b ). Except for the
2
addition of the double bass to reinforce the tonic pedal, b

is identical with b1 . A short coda (m. 48-51) brings the

movement to a close on a G sharp minor triad.

The third movement is a light-hearted dance in


1 1 2 3 2 U 8
sonata-rondo form (A B A CA B A = coda). The A sections

7. Ibid.

8. Because of the nature of the material and the divisions


within each section, the formal design also has the ^
characteristics of an episodical ternarypform. The A
section would thus comprise A1,B1, and A in the diagram
above; the B sectiog would be made up of _the .material in
C, with the final A section including A^, B , and A .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
163

are made up of two complementary melodies, the first of

which (a1 ) is introduced by the first violin in measure 1:

Ex. 76'

^ AUegco 2
jfiocoso
a .

irjr
vwolto \eggero

the a melody follows in measure 17 after an authentic

cadence in the key of P major:

10
Ex. 77

S e e ^ S
---- m -------I

This melody closes in F major with the french augmented sixth

chord (m. 25) resolving to the tonic triad (F major). In all

of the A sections the harmonic progressions follow traditional

patterns.

The abrupt shift to F sharp (m. 27 and 115), which

suggests the Neapolitan relationship, marks the beginning of

9. Ibid.

10. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
164

the B sections. These two short sections provide a degree

of contrast with their emphasis on chromatic lines:

Ex. 7-811

The transitional phrases within the B sections are not

clearly set off, but the tonic key of F major is established

some four measures before the return of the main thematic

material.

The C section, which is centered in D, is itself

a small ternary form. While the material is somewhat

reminiscent of that which was used in both the A and B parts,

it is essentially new. The first part of the ternary design

begins in measure 62 (note the use of hemiola):

11. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
165

12
Ex. 79

-JT

The short middle part (m. 75-85) also includes

hemiola:

Ex. 8013

The opening figure of this melodic line is to be found in

the principal theme of thefirst movement (see Example 72,

measure 2).

In the concluding part of the C section the original

melody (see Example 79) is literally restated by first violin,

but transposed up a minor 10th. This section comes to a

close (m. 95) on the dominant seventh chord of F major.

o 2 4\
The recapitulation (A , B , and A ) is condensed
4
but otherwise almost literal. The A section (m. 124-142)

12. Ibid.

13. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
166

and the coda are combined. A four-measure cadential ex

tension (m..142-145) brings the movement to a close on the

note F.

Sonata for Violoncello and Piano, Opus 6_

According to the note in the score, this sonata is

dedicated to the composer's teacher, Rosario Scalero. Al

though written in 1932 (it is the last composition that


14
Barber wrote under Scalero's supervision), it was not
15
published until 1936. It was for this sonata, together

with Music for a Scene from Shelley, Opus 7, that the com-

poser received the Pulitzer Prize (May 6, 1935), and the

Prix de Rome (May 9, 1935) The judges who granted the

awards were Deems Taylor, Carl Engel, Leo Sowerby and Walter
17
Damrosch.

This three movement work is expressive in the late

Nineteenth Century, romantic style. The piano part, almost

equal in importance to that of the cello, requires a large,

expansive technique. The piano writing in Brahms' Trio in

14. Broder, 74.

15. Ibid., 100.

16. "Samuel Barber Wins Two Musical Awards," Musical America


(May 25, 1935), 27.

17. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
167

E flat major for horn, violin and piano, or the cello

sonatas might well have served as models for this work. While

an extensive range is employed in the cello part, the medium-

low and low registers are particularly stressed. The chord

structures are predominately triadic with the emphasis being

placed on chromatically altered types familiar in the late

nineteenth century.

Edward Tatnall Canby, in a short discussion of

this work on the jacket of the recording, describes the

generating source behind the sonata:

The 'Cello Sonata is thus largely built on one


striking concatenation of tones set forth in
the very first measures and constantly there
after: as a strange and twisted altered chord,
as melody, and (taking the tones separately or
in groups), as whole centers of tonality. These
tones spell out no more than a familiar augmented
sixth chord but the treatment is utterly unlikeR
the older conception of this chord's function.

The augmented sixth chord so referred to is the following

one:

18. Concert Hall Bl.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
168

Ex. 8l19

The first movement, in sonata-allegro form, begins

immediately in C minor with the notes of the augmented sixth

chord in the form of a melody for the cello:

Ex. 822

A U c j r o w a w o v \t r o p p o J - 100

12
cu< EEg:

etc,
'ftf' jV t l
PP
P>.no

s
f
8va basta
t v \ p t ia W

19. Copyright, 1936, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York

20. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
169

This theme (m. 1-16), which makes up the first part of the

principal thematic area, consists of only one expansive

sentence, whose antecedent phrase comes to_a close on a half

cadence in measure 8. The hocket-like cadence that concludes

the consequent phrase (m. 15-16) overlaps the beginning of

the second part: the C natural in the cello (m. 16) is a

part of the authentic cadence of the principal theme, while

at the same time it begins the new section.

The second part (m. 16-27) continues to emphasize

the basic chord (see Example 8l) as the cello becomes the

accompanying instrument for the rhythmic figurations in the

piano. At measure 23, following a prolongation of the sub

tonic chord (m. 21-22), a somewhat modified statement of the

first phrase of the principal theme is played by the piano

with the cello supplying rhythmic commentary outlining the

same augmented sixth chord. The "quasi cadenza" that follows

this entry leads to the transitional section at measure 28,

where a series of augmented sixth chords, arpeggiated by the

piano, is especially prominent (m. 28-42). This section

comes to a close (m. 43) on the dominant of the dominant of

A flat major (B^DF).

The lyrical second theme follows in the cello in

measure 43, spanning the gap between the dominant chord and

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
170

Its resolution to the tonic of A flat major in measure 44.

21
Ex. 83

The piano takes up the theme in measure 50, followed by the

oello in free overlapping imitation. The second theme area

closes on the tonic triad of A flat major (m. 58-59).

The augmented sixth chord is again a significant

part of the short closing theme (m. 60-66) that is played

by the piano over a repeated pattern in the cello (see

Example 84).

21. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
171

Ex. 8422 (Gb = F#)

m
H I

2
i
The exposition section comes to a close (m. 66) on the

original German augmented sixth chord (AbCEbF^), this time

with A flat on the bottom, which is resolved to a C major

triad as the development section begins in measure 67.

The development section (m. 67-92) concerns itself

with the first theme material only. While it begins on a

C major triad, the basic chord (CAbF$D) serves as the tonal

center from measure 67 to 77, giving way to the key of B

minor at measure 78. Of particular interest is the

sequential passage (m. 82-91) in the cello and piano, which

develops the apparently insignificant material of measures

16 and 17. Following a modulation to F sharp minor in

measure Qj , this section comes to a close on a D sharp major-


minor seventh chord. Because the recapitulation section is

22. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
172

regular, no further details are necessary.

1 2
The second movement, an episodical form (A BA ),

combines an Adagio with a Scherzo. It opens with a pastoral

melody, A1 , in the cello, beginning in the related key of E

flat major and ending on the dominant triad of F major:

The contrasting B section (m. 11-48, P major), a

Presto in 12/8 meter, begins softly in the piano and cello:

24
Ex. 86

The Adagio returns ix measure 48.

23. Ibid.

24. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
173

The melodic material of the final section (m. 48-


1
64) is freely adapted from the original melody of A . While

the harmonic progressions are centered in E flat major as

this section begins, a strong cadence on the tonic chord does

not appear until measure 55. The movement comes to a quiet

close with a perfect authentic cadence.

The finale, like the first movement, is in sonata-

allegro form. While it is true that this work is outwardly

romantic in style, the tonal relationships in this movement

show that it is inwardly contemporary. The composer's

preoccupation with the larger musical implications of his

basic chord is brought to the fore as this Allegro

appassionato unfolds.

The rapid but somber principal theme in C minor

that is introduced by the piano (m. 1-11) is a ten-measure

sentence consisting of an antecedent phrase (m. 1-5)

followed by two responsive phrases (m. 5-9, 9-il). The

major mode on C is momentarily emphasized as the theme

begins:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
174

25
Ex. 87

A lle g r o * p p u * o v to M.M- J x S0

-r-r<
B_
b*~ J z i

p H

<
z /
W-~- --V fy----
'-

i r
i r i

The cello echoes the theme In measure 11 as the tonality

abruptly shifts to F sharp minor. This augmented fourth key


JL
relation (C-F ) emphasizes two important tones from the

first movement's generating chord structure (see Example 8l).

The transitional section begins at the Meno mosso

(m. 24) following an abrupt return to the key of C minor at

the end of the cello entry (m. 22). The thematic mat e n a l

is an outgrowth of the principal theme itself, a short two-

measure phrase that begins in measure 29 (see Example 88)

being later employed in the development section.

25. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
175

26
Ex. 88

CeUo g f c : f

Sewpt*e

Though the second theme (m. 36-46) starts on the

note E flat, it curiously centers about E minor. The cello

does not take part in the presentation of this theme, either

here or in the recapitulation.

Ex. 8927

Following a three-measure extension of the E minor cadence

(m. 44) that concludes this entry, the two instruments

bring the subordinate theme area to a close with a linking

26. Ibid.

27. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
176

measure ending on an augmented sixth chord (A^D^FB). This

chord slides down a half-step to G minor as the development

section begins.

The development section (m. 48-94), which is

rhapsodic in character, divides itself into two parts. The

first (m. 48-73), in the key of G minor, deals primarily

with the principal theme. An ascending chordal pattern at

measure 77* which again draws attention to the augmented

fourth and augmented sixth intervals, leads to the second

part at measure 73.

Sequential patterns based on the two-measure

phrase that appeared in the transitional section (see

Example 88) are shared by cello and piano from measure 77 to

88. The tonal center moves from A minor (m. 73-74) to E

flat minor (m. 75-79) and finally to E minor (m. 80-95).

An extended pedal emphasizing the notes E and G provides

a mediant-dominant prolongation that leads to the recapit

ulation section.

Nothing more clearly points up Barbers structural

ingenuity than what occurs as the recapitulation section

begins (m. 95). The piano provides a striking return to

the principal theme in F sharp minor with that familiar

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
177

tone in the cello's uppermost range. What was C minor is

now F sharp minor, and when the theme is stated by the cello

(m. 104), what was F sharp minor is now C minor. This

reversal of tonalities, which again draws attention to the

basic chord, effects a dynamic balance of key relations that

is certainly contemporary in feeling. The following diagram

will summarize the remaining part of the recapitulation and

the coda:

Recapitulation Coda

m. 95-114 m. 115-127 m. 128-140 m. 141-167


Pgin. theme. Transition 2nd theme. Emphasis on
F* minor section. Beginning on the two-
(m. 95-103) Essentially as the note A, measure
C minor before; but centering transition
(m. 104-114). A minor -> F in A minor. phrase (see
minor. An almost Example 8 8 ).
literal re Centered in
statement. C . Movement
ends on an
open 5th
C-G.

String Quartet, Opus 11

In 1936, while Barber was living at a lodge in

S t . Wolfgang near Salzburg, he wrote the chorus Let Down the

Bars, 0 Death, the song I_ Hear an Army, and the String


28
Quartet, Opus 11. Although the quartet was written

28. Broder, 3 3 .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
178

and published as a three-movement work, the composer now

regards it as consisting of only two movements, and prefers

that the Molto allegro section from pages 14 to 16 of the


2Q
first edition of the score be omitted in performance; how

ever, for the sake of completeness, it will be analyzed here.

In 1937 Barber made a string orchestra arrangement


30
of the second movement, naming it Adagio for Strings. The

popularity of this version, which is published separately,

has resulted in neglect of the quartet itself. Because the

Adagio for Strings is merely an arrangement and not a re

vision of the original movement, it will not be separately

taken up in this study. The work in its original form was

first played by the Pro Arte String Quartet in December,


31
1936, in Rome.

The first movement, Molto allegro appassionato,

is in sonata-allegro form. The principal thematic area


*1 p
(m. 1-3 1 ) is a small ternary design (a ba ), the first nine

measures of which present the theme (a_L) and serve as an

introduction:

29. Ibid., 74.

30. Ibid., 33, 34.

31. Ibid., 100.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
179

Ex. 9032

liotTe allegro e appass ioY))Ie j - r i b \

VII
> =. r *- =gi|t -f\-T*-r>
to----------
------ =

r+-
v ie .... C j 0: - -
v - p

(
r4
sC
vu.
rjfr
.
r m - i -33- . &.T' p
j - l E _ g p . . . i r r i _ 4 t -
*
0

*--------
Vc. Li--------
f ^
*

(The encircled notes and arrows will be referred

to when the closing theme is discussed.)

The b segment (m. 10-25), which develops and elaborates the

principal material, leads to a repetition of the unison


2
passage illustrated in Example 90 (a , m. 26-31). While

this section is centered in B minor, the constantly shifting

harmonies and the absence of strong dominant progressions

32. Copyright 19^3, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
180

tend to conceal the key.

A short transitional phrase (m. 32-37) establishes

the key of E major E minor and leads to the subordinate

area at measure 37 (see Example 91)* The cadence in measures

36 and 37 leading to the tonic triad of E major consists of

an augmented sixth chord with an ornamental resolution:

33
Ex. 91

rU malto
1


fife
J.lfO-p

^pp p
s
p Pi

33. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
l8l

While the key of E major predominates throughout

the B part of the subordinate area (in. 37-C.60), the

parallel minor mode on E and the submediant triad on C are

utilized. This section divides itself into two general

areas; the first (b1, m. 37-49 )> begins with a triplet

figure and employs repeated notes:

Ex. 9234
ate poco r it.

V II

The second (b^, m. 50-C.60), consists of a paraphrase of

the b^ melody along with a two-measure sequential pattern

34. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
182

outlining a descending scale:

Ex. 9335
& tempo prime
.1 . b 'v w tlo jy

t c . T r r_ e
m = m
VU $ T P

VUE

Wj-: .
V ta . " w

This section is concluded by a motive derived from the

principal theme.

The quarter notes that make up the beginning of

the closing theme that follows in measure 63 are taken

directly from the principal theme itself. A comparison of

Example 9^ with the encircled tones in Example 90 will

35. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
183

show the derivation.

36
Ex. 94

Piu.imifo

f - J - 4 - J ^ -

= = - --
d

fy | - f r r ...i y -
---- -----
w

The closing area (m. 63-93) is centered around E ending with

a deceptive cadence in measure 93.

The development section (m. 94-142) deals with the

principal thematic material and the closing theme, which is

itself a derivative of the principal theme. The quarter

note patterns that appear from measure 120 to 133 recall

36. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
184

measures 10 and 11 of the principal section and also the

closing theme.

The tonal center on E at the beginning of this

section is short lived. Following a fleeting reference to

B minor in measure 105 where the violins and viola present

stretto imitations of the head motive of the principal

theme, the tonality shifts to B flat (m. 109). The re

tention of the D flat major triad from measure 129 to 132

suggests the dominant of the dominant of B minor. It is

treated, however, as an augmented sixth chord resolving to

the Neapolitan harmony of B minor (CEG). A dominant pro

longation in the key of B minor immediately follows in

measure 135 and is retained to measure 143. A series of

stretto imitations of the head of the theme (m. 139-142)

leads to the original tempo and the beginning of the re

capitulation (m. 143).

The restatement of material is abbreviated and

the transitional phrase leading to the subordinate area is

omitted. Because this section is otherwise regular, it is

summarized in the diagram that follows.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
185

Principal Theme B Section Closing Theme-Coda


(m. 143-163) (m. 164-193) (m. 194-203)
B minor
Principal theme; Almost literal Altered and
abbreviated ending except for key. abbreviated over
on the tone B in tonic pedal. Ends
measure 1 6 3 . on unison B.

Harry Dexter says this about the second


movement:

Harmonically, the composer deliberately restricts


himself to the simplest effects, which, on paper
at least, often seem almost banal. Melodically,
the work seems sterile, and the climax too
calculated to achieve a genuine effect.37

To the contrary, this writer feels that here it is through

the use of simple harmonic and melodic material that a

sincere and deeply felt musical experience results.

The form of the movement, Molto adagio, can best

be dealt with through the "arch" concept. Through a series

of repetitions and extensions of a single theme (see Example

95) a dramatic climax is reached, and as the tension is

abated, a final statement brings the movement to a quiet

close. The characteristic structure of the cadences,

which tends to set off and yet merge several statements of

the theme, makes the ascent to the climactic point a

continuous one.

37. Harry Dexter, "Samuel Barber and His Music," 287.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
186

The long, sustained expressive theme, of which

only a part appears in the following example, is stated

in measure one beginning with the first violin alone:

Ex. 9538

VU

V II

The melodic flow is only slightly interrupted by the half

cadence in B flat minor that ends the first sentence in

measure 8:

38. Copyright, 19^3* G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
The second sentence closes with a plagal cadence in B flat

minor (m. 19) after having passed through E flat minor and

D flat major on the way. Following a more marked diversion

to E flat minor that ends with the Neopolitan chord resolv

ing to the dominant (m. 27-28), B flat minor is restored.

The tonality shifts more strongly to E flat minor as the

final rise to the climax begins in measure 44. At this

point the viola imitates the second violin at the fifth

above (m. 46) and in turn is imitated by the first violin

at the twelfth above (m. 47). The climax is reached at

measure 52 on the Neopolitan chord in first inversion of


, b b bx
E flat minor ( F A C ).

A short linking phrase (m. 53-56) provides a

return to the original tonality. The concluding statement

39. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
188

of the theme (m. 57-6 9 ), which is abbreviated, comes to a

close on a half cadence in B flat minor, leading without

pause to a somewhat altered repetition of the first movement,

beginning in B flat minor and omitting the B section of the

original exposition. The return to B minor is accomplished

in the closing measures of the coda. The following diagram

summarizes this section:

Principal Theme Closing Theme Coda


(m. 70-91) (m. 92-123) (m. 124-142)
b part of the original Centered around Emphasis on head
ternary design is E with a fleet motive of principal
omitted. Begins in ing reference theme. B minor
B minor, ends on to E minor established at
note C. (m. 110-114). measure 134. Ends
on B minor triad.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
189

Chapter V

THE CONCERTOS

Concerto for Violin and Orchestra, Opus 14

In the summer of 1939 Samuel Barber had settled

in Switzerland to work on a violin concerto, which had been

commissioned by a wealthy Philadelphia merchant for a young

prote'ge.'*' He did not, however, remain in Switzerland very

long, but returned to Paris, planning to complete the con

certo there in the fall. It was completed In the fall of

1939 > but in the United States rather than Paris. Shortly

before September 1, the date that Poland was attacked by

Germany, Barber had complied with the warnings of the

French government and returned to his home in New York

state.2

The first performance of the concerto with

Albert Spalding as soloist was given at a concert of the

Philadelphia Orchestra, Eugene Ormandy conducting, on


, 3
February 7 , 1941. It was introduced to a New York

1. Nathan Broder, Samuel Barber (New York: G. Schirmer, Inc.,


1954), 34.

2. Ibid., 35-

3. Ibid., 36.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
190

audience four days later when the Philadelphia Orchestra

played in Carnegie Hall.

Like several other works by Barber, this con-,

certo has undergone revisions; the revised version is being

used for the present analysis. At this time the orchestral

score and parts are available only on rental from the

publishers. The published version is for violin and piano,

which, of necessity, will have to suffice for this pre

sentation. While there are some indications of the

orchestration included in the piano part, they are by no

means complete.. Judging from the recording, the scoring

is for small orchestra using woodwinds in pairs, two horns,

two trumpets, timpani, piano and strings.

The first movement is written in sonata-allegro

form. It opens immediately with a melody of almost classical

simplicity for the soloist (see Example 97). The melodic

line employs the diminished-minor and major seventh chords;

the interval of a seventh, both major and minor, also

assumes an important melodic rle.

4. Ibid., 36.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
191

5
Ex. 97

Allegro

" ^ ----- - U T -
= = _ , |t
M
iTTn fjjJ
W' w
erpress.

O '
------- 4 v --------- 1 j

.... 0-----------
rasi

|j= = J s.... a
Mi
- - - p8z_:----- .

The principal theme area (m. 1-24) is in the key

of G major with a decided stress on the subdominant area of

C major. While some use is made of the major and major-minor

seventh chords, the chord structures are predominantly

triadic. It will be noted too, that the added tone

technique (added 4th and 6th) is apparent from measure 19

through measure 22. At the close of the principal theme

area in measure 24 on a C major triad, the solo instrument

alone provides a two-measure bridge passage of ascending

sixteenth-notes, which, like the principal theme itself, is

derived from the diminished-minor and major seventh chords.

5. Copyright 1942, 1949, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
192

The changing tone figure is also an important part of this

passage:

6
Ex. 98

(* C.T. = changing tones. The circles around the notes are

used to point out the filled-in seventh chords.)

The second theme area begins in measure 27 with

the first subordinate theme (B^), whose antecedent phrase

skips gravely through the clarinet in the key of E minor,

under an inverted pedal on B:

6. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
193

Ex. 997

In the above example it may be seen that the Phrygian mode

is suggested by the consistent use of F natural; the

descending fourth is also stressed. The consequent phrase

that begins in measure 32 retains the rhythmic anacrusus of

the first phrase, and, like the principal theme, it stresses

triplet figurations. The harmony from measure 33 through 37

is static, being primarily made up of a diminished seventh

and diminished-minor seventh chord on F sharp.

g
A ritornello aspect of the movement, which is

brought about by two appearances of the principal theme in

this area, is a cohesive factor in the formal design of the

7. Ibid.

8. Cedric Thorpe Davie, Musical Structure And Design


(London: Dennis Dobson, 19^3)/ 9;1-.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
194

exposition section. Except for the change of key to E

major, a literal reappearance of the principal theme

occurs from measure 40 to 50j the next reference to the

principal theme (m. 61-6 5 ) is limited to a figure made up

of four sixteenth-notes, which is associated with the head

of the theme.

2
The second subordinate theme (B , m. 49-60) is

basically in E minor. It begins with a sprightly figure,

which has the air of a closing theme:

Ex. 100

Beginning with the fourth beat of measure 51, the solo

instrument and the clarinet interchange a motive that

stresses augmented and perfect fourths. They continue

this ascending and descending fourth-chord figuration in an

ostinato-like manner through measure 57. The solo violin

takes over altogether in measure 58 with a succession of

rapid scale passages leading to a dissonant outburst, the

9. Copyright, 1942, 1949, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
195

only one in the entire work, based on a figure from the

principal theme. (This reappearance of the principal

thematic material in measures 61-65 has already been re

ferred to in connection with the rltomello aspect.)

A whole tone chord, which is outlined in measure

66, functions as a dominant to E minor and leads to a re

appearance of the first subordinate theme (B1 ) in that key.

A literal restatement of the antecedent phrase of the

theme, over a throbbing repeated E, brings the exposition

to a close.

A change of tempo and a change of key mark the be

ginning of the development section (m. 79-124), which con

cerns itself almost exclusively with the development of the

principal theme. The B 1 theme does, however, appear in the


2
closing measures, and the B theme, with its emphasis on the

interval of the fourth, is suggested from measure 93 through

104.

Beginning in the key of B flat major, the solo

instrument plays an ascending figure in triplets outlining

a major-minor seventh chord, sustaining then a high B flat

while the strings introduce the principal theme in measure

81. An augmentation of the four-note figure from the head

of the theme is then taken up by the solo violin (m. 86),

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
196

leading In measures 89 through 92 , to an augmentation of the

material that appeared in measures 15 through 18.

In measure 93 the solo part suggests the sprightly


2
motive that made up the B theme, but the accompaniment

figuration, now primarily made up of a G flat major seventh

chord, is derived from the principal theme. The B flat

pedal (m. 93-98) finally gives way to a D pedal in measure

99> which serves as a submediant pedal to the key of E

major in measure 105. A cascading figure beginning in

measure 105, which is a development of the second measure

of the principal theme, prevails as the key center changes

to G minor (m. Ill) and to D major (m. 118). As the B1

theme is introduced by the winds and piano in measure 118,

a dominant prolongation (somewhat disguised by added tones)

is set up and extended to the beginning of the recapitula

tion section (m. 125-190).

The recapitulation of the principal theme is given

to the full orchestra at the dynamic level of forte rather

than just the solo instrument. With but slight exceptions,

the thematic material of both the principal and subordinate

areas is restated literally. The passage that concludes the

principal theme area (m. 147-150), is slightly changed in

both the solo and accompanying parts, now ending on an E

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
197

flat major rather than a C major triad as before. Except

for being transposed up a major third, the two-measure

bridge passage from measure 150 to 153 is identical with

that which appeared in the exposition section (m. 24-27).

This linking passage leads to a literal restatement of the


1
first subordinate theme, B , in the key of G minor, and,

as before, the consequent phrase of B1 is followed by a re

statement of the principal theme. Although the key of C

minor is predominant at the outset of the principal theme

(m. 166-169), G minor prevails. A literal restatement of


2
the second subordinate theme, B , in measure 174 (the closing
2
theme aspect of B is more definitely sensed in this section

than before) leads to the introduction of a prolonged tonic

pedal beginning in measure 185. A descending figure derived

from the second measure of the principal theme culminates

on a forceful unison on the note E flat. While the tone E

flat is being held by the timpani and lower strings, the

solo violin plays a short cadenza based on the motive from

the second measure of the principal theme and also on the


2
motive in fourths of the B theme. The cadenza is followed

by a restatement of the B^ theme at the beginning of the

coda at measure 191* A rhythmic tonic pedal underlies al

most this whole section. The principal theme, although now

freely transformed, is once more introduced at measure 208,

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
198

with the movement coming to a quiet close on a complete G


major triad.

The second movement is in many ways akin to the

Adagio for Strings, hut is considered by some critics to be

much stronger melodically than that work, and emotionally

not so obvious. Like the Adagio for Strings, the emphasis

is on a flowing, lyrical melody. The solo part is simple

and clear with a minimum of violinistic acrobatics. This


1 2
Andante, which is cast in three-part form (A BA ) with a

short introduction and coda, begins in C sharp minor and

ends in E major. The chord structures, as in the first

movement, are predominantly triads, a limited use being

made of the major-minor, diminished-minor, and diminished

seventh chords. While the root movement of chords is

largely by fifths (or fourths), extensive use is also made

of chords whose roots are a third apart.

1
Part 1, A , is a ternary form in itself, whose

first section, a \ begins its song in the oboe:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
199

Following a kind of plagal cadence in measure 7 , the second

section, b, begins with the head of the theme transposed up

a major third, closing in measure 16 with an authentic

cadence in E major. An overlapping takes place in measure

16, where the cellos begin section three, a , with a state

ment of the theme on the cadence chord of the b part. The

third section is concluded in C sharp minor in measure 18

with a plagal cadence not unlike the cadence to part 1. The

clarinet and oboe (m. 1 7 -2 1 ), using a six-note motive

derived from the second phrase of the theme (see Example 101,

5-6), provide a linking passage that leads to a sudden

modulation to B flat minor and the beginning of the bridge

section (m. 21). The melodic material of the bridge passage,

which is presented by the strings and horn, is derived from

the head of the principal theme and its transformations. A

pedal on B, which is set up in measure 28 as the horn

10. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
200

concludes the bridge section, extends through measure 36.

In measure 30, a dominant prolongation (the tone E, which

is sustained by the horn, might be considered as an added

fourth to the incomplete major-minor seventh chord on B) to

the key of E minor is begun, the tonic of E minor being

reached in measure 37*

The solo violin enters in measure 30 with a

melodic passage outlining triads. This passage has the air

of an introduction leading to the B theme proper beginning

in measure 37 at the Piu mosso; the fact that E minor is

rather forcefully reached at measure 37 supports the major

division of the form at this place.

Part Two, B, is a binary form in itself. The solo

violin states the theme of Part 1, a, supported by the brass

and strings beginning in measure 37. (Like the principal

theme of the first movement, this theme is based on chord

outlines; note measure 38 particularly.) The a theme

comprises one sentence, extending from measure 37 to

measure 46, which is made up of a descending sequential

pattern based on measure 3 8 . Although the tonic of E minor

was established at measure 37* it is quickly followed by a

progression of chords in P major. The latter key is reached

at measure 46, but it is not firmly established until

*>

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
201

measure 50.

A three-note motive followed by a descending leap

of a fifth, which appears in measure 41, is used from

measures 46 through 48 as an ostinato figure forming a

transitional phrase leading to the b theme of Part Two. In

the following example it will be seen that the solo instru

ment also employs the figure:

11
Ex. 102

U n poio a g ita to (in 3)

tr.

-AIN

The above figure, which is derived from the theme of Part 1

(see Example 101, m. 6), leads to the b theme of Part 2

11. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
202

(m. 5 0 ) as the key of P major is firmly established.

The head of the b theme is derived, through

augmentation, from the ostinato figure illustrated in

Example 102; the original rhythmic form appears in the

solo part in measure 52. Over a prevailing tonic pedal on

P, the solo instrument plays a cadenza-like passage begin

ning in measure 59 that brings Part 2 to a close. At


A
measure 60, a german augmented sixth chord (FACD ) is held

in the strings as the soloist trills the note E flat (D^).

The augmented sixth on P expands to an E major triad, the

key of Part 3.

2
Part 3, A , consists of two reappearances of the

principal theme. Except for the omission of the first two

measures, the first restatement is literal (m. 61-72). This

is followed by a bridge passage not unlike that which was

used in Part 1, leading to another almost literal restate

ment of the principal theme in the key of C sharp minor

(m. 89-95).

The coda (m. 95-II5 ) serves to summarize the

material that was used in the entire movement, the material

from all three parts being presented simultaneously. The

solo violin presents the ostinato figure that was used in

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
203

Part 2 and the descending chord pattern that made up the

a theme of Part 2; the upper strings utilize the a theme of

Part 2 and a part of the bridge passage from Part 1; the

melodic passage in the horn, which follows later in the

trumpet, is derived from the principal theme of the movement,

and the cadenza (m. 105-107) is based on the ostinato figure

of Part 2. A descending chord motive from the a theme of

Part 2 is presented by the solo violin (m. 110) cadencing

on an E major triad in measure 112. This cadence is extended

some three and one-half measures by repetition.

The sharp contrast between the finale and the

other two movements is openly criticised by Harry Dexter. In

his article in Musical Opinion, he states:

The third movement to which I have already referred,


is a perpetuum mobile, which, powerful as it is,
with its immense technical accomplishment, its
drive and dramatic denouement, is hardly the right
finale for the other two movements. In it one feels
that instead of running-off the first two movements
Barber throws them overboard.12

While Dexter's criticism seems valid to this writer, there

is at least a reasonable explanation for this sharply con

trasted movement. As previously stated, this work was

12. Harry Dexter. "Samuel Barber And His Music," Musical


Opinion J2 (March 19^9)> 286.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
204

commissioned by a wealthy merchant for a young protege', who

after seeing the first two movements, complained that they

were not only far too easy, but they were not brilliant

enough for a concerto. Barber set out to satisfy his client,

but as it turned out this effort, too, was fruitless, since

the violinist thought that the last movement was far too

difficult, indeed, unplayable; for this reason, the composer

was obliged to return half the fee, the violinist in turn


13
relinquishing his right to the first public performances.

While the character of the finale is somewhat

reminiscent of the last movement of Mendelssohn's Italian

Symphony, the irregular rhythms and dissonances (largely a

result of the added tone technique) are quite un-Mendelssohnian.

The more frequent use of irregular rhythms and the increase

in the dissonant quality of the harmony are two important

factors in the composer's apparent desire to cast off the

chains of conservatism that were manifest in the first two

movements.

The material falls into a rondo form with a short


1 n o
two-measure introduction and a coda (intro. A BA CA-5 and

Coda combined). It is based on the following theme and

13. Broder, 35.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
205

its extensions played by the solo violin:

14
Ex. 103

j3jPrjto iv\wiotc ptrpfttuo

Violivt k k

Some contrast is provided by the appearance of a theme in

the orchestra beginning thus:

15
Ex. 104
C l> o b

P m * v n a rc a to

The movement may be diagrammed as follows:

14. Copyright 1942, 1949* G. Schirmer.

15. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
206

Intro. B

m. 1-2 m. 3-58 m. 59-84 m. 85-104


Fragment of Theme in solo Literal repeat The "contrast-
principal violin over of theme in A ing theme"
theme in rhythmic chords minor followed and a jagged
timpani., in orchestra. by modified figure of
establishing A minor m. 3- appearance of as cending
the key of A 17 D minor theme in C and descend
minor. m. 18-28 major and C ing intervals
C major and minor (m. 75- of the ninth
C minor 84). comprise the
m. 23-38. essential
material.
Free use of
parallel
modes with a
central tonic
on C is
evident.

A and Coda combined


m. 105-144 m. 145-172 m. 173-189
m. 130 4------- Predominantly in A minor
A literal re Four appearances Principal theme in
statement of of "contrasting diminution in solo violin
theme in A theme," stress against punctuating chords
minor in being placed on in orchestra. Effective
strings repeated note use of polyharmony (m.
(m. 105-111) aspect. 185); E flat minor against
followed by F major seventh chord.
transformation Augmented fourth root re
of theme. lationship stressed in
Ostinato in final measures Eb minor
solo violin seventh chord to open
stressing fifth on A and E that
interval of the closes movement (trumpets
sixth. emphasized this augmented
E d m. 114, fourth earlier from
moving to C measure 171 to 172).
major and
minor m. 121,
back to A
minor, m. 130.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
207

Capricorn Concerto, Opus 21

The Capricorn Concerto, Opus 21, was named after


1ft
Barber's house on Croton Lake at Mt. Kisco, New York.
17
Written in 1944 especially for the Saidenberg Little

Symphony, the work is scored in concerto grosso style after

the manner of the Bach Brandenburg Concerto No. 2 for flute,

oboe, trumpet (concertino group), and strings.

This work is characterized by a rather dry,

brittle quality, which is in sharp contrast to those works

belonging to Barber's first (so-called neo-romantic) period.

Tonally, the composition is essentially in the key of C

major. The latter key, however, is not definitely proclaimed

until the third and last movement. The first two movements

show Barber's predilection for the third relationship; the

first movement centers around A minor, a third below C, and

the second movement is clearly in the key of E flat major,

a third above C. The chord structures are largely triadic

in origin, but extensive use is made of the added-tone

technique. The harmonic language is definitely not atonal,

or polytonal, but the use of chords with added tones, and

16. Broder, 3 8 .

17. Ibid., 102.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
208

other coloristic devices (polychords, etc.), often obscures

the harmony to such an extent that it is sometimes difficult

to identify the tonal center at a particular moment.

Although the formal design of the first movement

bears some resemblance to the rondo, all the material is

constructed from motives presented early in the movement.

The individual themes are constructed in such a manner .that

a certain amount of contrast results, but they are all so

obviously related that the principle of motivic development

(or variation) seems to be the generative factor. Indeed,

the form of the movement might, when judged by normal

standards, be felt to be rather loose, and the rhythmic con

trasts between large sections too great. Yet the inner

coherence and unity produced by the motivic development is

enough to hold the movement together in a very satisfactory

manner.

It is possible to identify four principal motives

that are stated in the introduction. The material out of

which the entire movement is to be developed appears in the

introduction. The character of the music is very terse, the

lines being rather disjunct, and the rhythm syncopated.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
209

18
Ex. 105 The four principal motives

It is possible to divide the movement into three

main parts, and to further divide the parts into sections.

Part 1 extends from measure 17 to measure 53* This

part is a fugal development of a subject that is partially-

made up of motive one. The principal contrapuntal device used

is that of stretto. (Note: m. 29-32, 33-34, 37-40, and

52-53).

In the first section of Part 1 (A1, m. 17-40), the

solo group, beginning with the oboe, then the flute, and

finally the trumpet, introduces the fugue subject. The ex

position of the fugue subject is carried out along rather

traditional lines. The subject, as announced by the oboe, is

18. Copyright, 1945, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
210

given a real answer at the 5th above by the flute in

measure 21. The material in the oboe part, measures 22-23,

has the appearance of a countersubject. These subjects later

appear in inversion at the octave (m. 26). At measure 29,

the violas, cellos and basses state the subject in stretto,

replaced by the upper strings at measure 33* The solo group

returns (m. 37-40) with another stretto of the subject. This

entire section emphasizes the tonic key, A minor, very

strongly.

The second section of Part 1 begins in measure 4l

and extends to measure 45. This section is composed of a

stretto of the first three notes of the fugue subject be

tween the violins, and also a stretto of a melody derived

from motive one. The tonality here is E major.

The third section of Part 1, measures 46-53, is an

emphatic restatement of the fugue subject in the tonality of

C sharp minor.

Part 2 is built upon all four of the motives that

were stated in the introduction plus the fugue subject, which

was itself shown to employ the first motive. It is a return

to the terse, rhythmic style of the introduction, which is in

sharp contrast to the lyricism of the fugal section. This

part of the work emerges as the principal section of the

movement.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
211

The first section of Part 2 (A, m. 5^-90), opens

in the solo group with a fragment based on motives one and

three, which is answered by the violas and cellos with

material derived from the fugue subject. This interplay con

tinues with other fragments appearing in the course of the

development of the movement. Note the appearance of motive

two in measure 6 6 , and again in measures 79-8^ (in stretto).

Motive four appears in measure 8 5, and motive two is again

used in measures 8 8-8 9 .

The second section of Part 2 (B, m. 91-99)> in

troduces a new theme. This new theme introduced by the oboe

in measure 91 has strong rhythmic ties with the preceding

material, but it is nevertheless somewhat more relaxed in

nature. The theme retains the rhythmic figure that is

associated with the head of motive two; the accompaniment in

the violins, although now in a different rhythmic dress, is

suggestive of motive one. Following a short statement of the

theme by the first violin in measure 95> a return is quickly

made to the original material of the section at measure 100.

The third section of Part 2, C, begins in measure

100 and extends to measure 129. After a short statement of

the principal theme of this section (m. 100-102), a stretto

of material derived from motive two occurs in measures

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
212

103-109. There follows a melody that is developed primarily

from motives one and three. This theme assumes much import

ance, as it is heard three times: first in the trumpet

(m. 109-1 15 )* next in the oboe (m. 117-123), and finally in

the flute (m. 124-129).

Section four of Part 2 (A2, m. 130-157)* begins

with a short restatement of the principal theme of Part 2.

The theme of the third section of Part 2, C, is stated (in

part) in the cellos and basses (m. 133-140) over which appears

a canonic treatment of a fragment derived from motive one.

Against an P-C pedal in the strings is set a development of

the fugue subject (m. 142-145). This is followed by motive

two in both the flute and oboe parts. The remaining measures

of this section produce a rhythmical cadencing effect that

brings Part 2 of this movement to a close in the key of A

minor.

Part 3, the coda, (m. 159-199)* is composed of two

main sections. The first section (m. 158-163) is a return

to the fugue subject, briefly reestablishing the lyric mood

of that part of the movement. It is of such short duration,

however, that it seems almost an after-thought. This fleet

ing reference to an earlier mood is reminiscent of a similar

occurrence in the Coda of the Scherzo section of the First

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
213

Symphony. The second section of the coda (m. 164-196) re

turns to the terse, mechanistic mood of the introduction as

the tonic key of A minor is strongly re-emphasized.

The second movement is written in three-part


1 2 l
episodical form (A BA ). The first part, A , is in itself

ternary, considering the relatively short length of the

movement, the degree of contrast achieved in the middle

section seems slightly excessive. The material, however,

is derived from the A section.

In Part 1 (a\ m. 1-29), which is in the key of E

flat major, the first section (a\ m. 1-9) is composed of two

four-measure phrases plus a one-measure extension by

repetition of the cadence. In the second section (b, m. 10-

1 5 ) the same dry, scherzo-like quality of the previous one

is maintained, but some contrast is achieved. Section three


2 T
(a , m. 16-24) is structurally identical to a ; the tonality,

however, is G flat major. The principal theme is heard in

the trumpet against the counter melody in the oboe in the

codetta section (m. 24-29). E flat major is reestablished

and the concluding cadence is extended two measures through

repetition.

Part 2, B, extends from measure 30 to 39.

Rhythmically and expressively, this short section is in

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
214

marked contrast to the preceding. The material, however, is

very clearly derived from the principal theme of Part 1.

(Note the use of the ascending third motive.)

2
Part 3i A , is composed of three restatements of

the principal theme with its ever present counter melody.

The theme appears first in the flute (m. 40-43), then the

trumpet (m. 44-46), and finally the oboe (m. 47-51).

Measures 51-56 constitute a coda based upon the counter

melody. It might be noted that at this point the material

bears a generic resemblance to motive one of the first move

ment. The cello brings the movement to a close, ending on

the note E flat.

In the third and final movement C major is affirmed

as the tonal center. The trumpet opens it with a fanfare

like passage against strong C major chords in the strings.

The form is a rondo (A^BA^CA^DA^) with some of the

characteristics of the sonata rondo. The A sections of this'

movement are all remarkably diatonic. The only accidentals

encountered up to measure 32, for example, are B flat and F

sharp.

1
Part 1, A , extends from measure 1 to 31. This

part divides itself into two sections (somewhat resembling

the principal and subordinate themes of sonata form). The

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
215

first section of Part 1 (a, m. 1-22) is entirely in the key

of C major, and consists of the fanfare-like trumpet passage

and a subsequent motivic development of it. Note, for ex

ample, the stretto (m. 20-2 3 ), which serves as a link'to the

next section. In the second section of Part 1 (b, m. 23-31)

a new melody appears in the oboe (m. 23-25). This melody

itself is in the key of C major, but the prevailing tonality

here is P majoi.

Part 2, B, begins in measure 32 and extends to

measure 60. While the preceding section was notably diatonic,

this section is exceptionally chromatic, by which a rather

exaggerated contrast is produced. A new motive of two

descending semitones emerges as the principal structural unit

of this section; it pervades this entire part.

2
A return to the principal material, of A , is made

at letter G, measure 61. This part is again predominantly

diatonic. The trumpet passage is now set a third higher

than before. The flute and oboe add color to the C major

triad that is forcefully reiterated by the strings.

Part 4, C, (m. 71-114) is rather developmental in

nature. The tonality is almost entirely that of E major.

The material consists chiefly of rhythmic mutations of

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
216

motives previously stated. Although the melody that is

introduced by the viola at the very outset of the development

section, measure 7 1 # does not assume any degree of importance,

several fleeting references are made to it later in the

movement.

Part 5> A , divides itself into two sections like

A1 . It extends from measure 115 to 150. The first section

(a, m. 115-125) consists of the trumpet passage in the tonic

key of C major. Note the pedal B flat and the prevailing B

flats in the upper parts, which make this section assume the

character of a dominant prolongation in the key of F major

(the key of the succeeding section). The second section,

(b, m. 126-150) is made up of the same material as in the

corresponding section in A, but is somewhat extended. Note

the canonic treatment in measures 134-137# which appears


13
over a V prolongation (m. 134-140). The principal theme

(a) is heard in the cellos and basses (m. 141-149); this

section provides a tonic prolongation and serves as a

codetta.

The principal melodic material of Part 6 (D, m. 151-

168) consists of two rather noncommittal themes; the first a

chorale-like melody:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
.217

Ex. 10619
Svi,---------

S f f i f f f t ir P

the second Is an obbligato-like counter melody:

Ex. 10720

1Frctjllg
Neither is traceable to any other theme in the rest of the

movement. The tonality is C major.

A strong restatement of the principal theme of the


4
movement is made in Part 7 (A , m. 169-1 78 ), and the work is

brought to a forceful close in the tonic key of C major.

Concerto for Violoncello and Orchestra, Opus 22

This concerto was commissioned by John Nicholas

Brown of Providence, Rhode Island, an amateur cellist, for

19. Ibid;

20. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
218

Raya Garbousova.21 Completed on November 27, 19^5, it was

given its premiere on April 5* 1946 by the Boston Symphony

Orchestra, Sergei Koussevitsky conducting, with Raya


22
Garbousova as soloist. In 1950, the composer accepted an

offer from the London Gramophone Corporation to record some

of his works in England, with himself as the conductor.^

According to the information on the jacket of the record,

the Ballet Suite Medea, the Second Symphony, and the Violon-

cello Concerto were recorded at Kingsway Hall in London dur-


24
ing December of 1950.

While there are many passages in this work that owe

a great deal to the Capricorn Concerto (1944), it is apparent

that the composer is extending rather than merely repeating

the compositional techniques that he used in his earlier

work. The solo writing in this composition, when compared

with that of the Violin Concerto, which was written six years

earlier, consistently calls for greater virtuosity on the part

of the performer. In addition to the many cantilena passages,

21. Broder, 38.

22. Ibid., 102.

23. Ibid., 39.

24. Zara Nelsova, cellist, with the New Symphony Orchestra


conducted by the composer (London LPS 332).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
219

It bristles with multiple stops, harmonics, and difficult

patterns requiring rapid shifts in position. Besides the

solo cello, it is scored for 2 flutes, 1 oboe, English horn,

2 clarinets, bass clarinet, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 3 trumpets,

percussion and strings.

The classical double exposition is apparent in the

first movement, Allegro moderato, in which the composer uses

the sonata-allegro design as his point of departure. The

principal material is stated first by the orchestra, the

solo cello then dealing with all of it in one form or

another. An angular motive (Motive l) that begins the work

(see Example 108) leads directly to one of the principal

themes and returns occasionally during the course of the

movement; it also introduces and ends the development section


25
and brings the movement to a close.

25. The reappearance of this instrumental introduction as the


movement progresses supports the ritornello conception
of the form as described by Cedric Thorpe Davie, Musical
Structure And Design, 5^.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
220

E x. 10826

1st TViev.

The chords are for the most part built in thirds

with added tones; there are, however, several passages that

show quartal derivation. Much use is made of pedal points,

ostinato figures, and unison passages.

The tonality of D minor is established as the

flute and English horn introduce the first theme (see

Example 108, measures 3 - H ) over a rhythmic ostinato-like

figure in the clarinets. Although major and minor seconds

are stressed in this accompanying figure, the dynamic level

and the lower range of the clarinets greatly minimize the

dissonant quality. Punctuating chords in the lower strings

and an inverted dominant pedal in the first violins are also

present.

26. Copyright 1950, 1952, by G. Schlrmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
221

The bassoons introduce an important transitional

phrase in measure 11:

27
Ex. 109

It provides a rhythmic contrast to the lyrical quality of the

first theme and to the second theme that follows in measure

19 (see Example 110). The submediant harmony is substituted

for the tonic triad of D minor as the second theme begins in

the first violins:

28
Ex. 110

A fragment of the transitional phrase, which appears

in the second bassoon in measures 27 and 28, leads to another

appearance of Motive 1_ in the first violins, imitated at the

octave below by the second violins, and finally by the second

27. Ibid.

28. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
222

bassoon. A sustained first inversion D major triad with

added sixth prevails during this presentation. The bassoons

and English horn (m. 35-^0) revert to the transitional

material as a sustained whole tone chord on C (CG^A^B^) is

set up in measure 48. This chord serves as a tonal center

(m. 41-52) for the more elaborate treatment of the transi

tional material in the solo cello, a passage that provides

a long, preliminary flourish leading to the first theme.

The tonality reverts to D minor as the solo

instrument (m. 67) commences the second exposition beginning

with an exact statement of the first theme. The clarinets

again supply an ostinato-like figure over a dominant pedal

in the second horn, which is changed to a mediant pedal

during the consequent phrase (m. 71-7*0. 4 fourth-chord on

E (EADG), by its many repetitions, serves as the tonal

center (m. 75-9 0 ) as the solo cello presents several trans

formations of the first theme. This section is marked by

imitative treatment of the transitional material in the

woodwinds leading to the return of D minor at measure 99-

From measures 104 to 111 the solo cello, playing double

stops in thirds and sixths, spins out a motive derived from

the head of the transitional phrase, thus leading to the

repetition of the second theme played by the violins in

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
223

octaves; this statement is at first almost identical with

that which appeared in measures 19-23, even remaining at

first in the tonic key, but soon moving off to C minor

(m. 122) as the solo instrument transforms the material.

The winds and strings (m. 125-138) supply a rhythmic back

ground based on the transitional material and Motive 1_. A

sustained C pedal in the cellos under descending harmonic

thirds in half-steps in the clarinets (m. 144-152), while the

solo carries out a sequential pattern still based on the

second theme, leads to a closing theme (in. 156-165) played

by the cello alone:

29
Ex. Ill

Soto C e ll*

i
The interval of a major sixth (C-A), which acts as the

cadence chord, leads to Motive 1_ and the beginning of the

development section at measure 166.

The development section (m. 166-261) divides itself

29. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
224

into four parts culminating in an extended cadenza by the

solo cello. Except in Part 1, the tonal centers are generally

stable. In addition to the common triads, extensive use is

made of seventh chords and an occasional ninth. The first

section of Part 1 (m. 166-183) begins with Motive 1 on P

sharp and leads directly to the development of the first

theme beginning in B minor; the second section (m. 184-195 )>

which functions as a bridge passage, is based on a figure

present in the transitional phrase (see Example 109, measure

2). It leads to the key of E flat (m. 192) and to Motive 1_,

which begins Part 2.

Part 2 (ra. 195-223), includes material from the

first theme, transitional phrase, and the closing theme

(see Example 111). The tonality of E flat begins to dis

solve at measure 210, and a sustained G major triad (m. 220-

228), which is stressed by the solo cello and accented G

major triads in the violas, suggests a dominant prolongation

in C. The triad is resolved, however, down a third to E as

Part 3 begins at measure 224.

The meter changes from 2/4 to 6/8 as the clarinets

introduce Motive 1 on E under an inverted pedal on E in the

first violins. Part 3 (m. 224-245), is based almost entirely

on Motive 1 and a new melody, which is somewhat reminiscent

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
225

of the second theme:

30
Ex. 112

The tonality of E is replaced by F sharp at measure 237, this

new center being retained throughout Part 4 as well as the

extended cadenza passage.

Part 4 (m. 246-261) deals mainly with the second

theme, whose antecedent phrase is stated by the solo cello

against the consequent phrase in the violins; it ends with

a sustained chord outlining a perfect fifth on P sharp with

an added G sharp.

The cadenza that follows provides an excellent

opportunity for the soloist to display both his technical

and lyrical artistry. It includes, in one form or another,

all the material that has been presented thus far. The in

terval of a minor sixth (A^-F^) that ends this passage is

immediately followed by the recapitulation of the first

30. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
226

theme by the oboe (m, 262).

While the first theme is restated in full, the

transitional phrase and second theme appear only in

abbreviated form in the recapitulation (m. 262-317). The

following diagram summarizes this section and the coda:

Recapitulation Coda

m. 262-318 m. 319-367
D minor
Orchestra: 1st theme Based on 1st theme,
in oboe, with orna transitional
mented dominant material and Motive
pedal in strings 1. Ends with
and ostinato in Motive 1 on the
clarinets; Solo dominant note (A)
cello: 1st theme in the full
(m. 277-289). orchestra.
Fragments of transi
tional phrase and
second theme (m. 289-
304). Bridge pass
age (m. 305-316)
similar to that used
in development
section (m. 184-191).

A lyrical melody in a siciliano-like rhythm is the

basis of the short but expressive slow movement (see Example

113). The muted cellos and basses along with the two flutes

outline the tonic triad of C sharp minor in measure 1. The

solo cello enters with the lyrical theme as the clarinets

begin a descending scale pattern based on the pure form of

the C sharp minor scale. The cello entry is imitated in

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
227

canon by the oboe in measure 3.

31
Ex. 113

---- -

'IN
ff / I

! % =
f etr

The theme is transferred to the lower strings against a

counter-melody in the upper ones at measure 1 9 :

,32
Ex. 114
Vl$. ton Jovd.

El t:
' wip v*oTo esfc

VU.+ V<.m

31. Ibid.

32. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
228

This theme and its counter-melody are used

throughout the movement, which, rather than falling into any

kind of clear tripartite division, unfolds in the form of an

arch: after a tranquil beginning, it rises to a high point at

measure 48, returning to the original mood in the closing

section (m. 55-62).

Besides common triads, extensive use is made of

various types of seventh-chords - frequently the major seventh,

major-minor seventh, minor seventh, and to a lesser extent,

the diminished seventh. Quartal harmony, which is not other

wise particularly significant in this movement, appears in

the trumpets in measures 42 and 43. Although the chords

present no specific problem of identification, the lack of

the stronger root movement by fifths often results in an

ambiguity of key center within a given phrase.

While there are frequent changes in the meter

signatures, eight-eight time is most commonly used. It

divides itself into the following patterns: 3+3+2, 3+2+3*

and 2+3+3. The passage from measure 15 to 19 is particularly

interesting, as the oboe and solo cello present the different

divisions of these basic patterns at the same time.

The key center changes to F sharp minor at measure

23 as the oboe freely imitates the solo cello at the fifth

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
229

below. The siciliano-like rhythm and melodic stressing of

the interval of a third that make up the principal theme are

continued by the violin and clarinet in measure 36, leading

to the fermata chord on P sharp minor with an added G sharp

and D sharp (m. 39). A short solo passage in the cello,

based essentially on a series of fourths, leads back to the

key of C sharp minor (m. 40).

As the final ascent to the climactic point of the

movement begins (m. 44), the meter changes momentarily to

5/8. A diminished seventh chord is outlined in measure 47


b
(FA BD) leading to the key of B minor at the height of the

arch at measure 48. The dynamic level is forte as the upper

strings present the counter-melody against the principal

theme in the lower strings. As the tension subsides, a

gradual return to the key of C sharp minor begins. It is

difficult to ascertain the exact point where the shift in

tonality occurs, but possibly the original key is entered

through the submediant triad at measure 52, where, as the

strings sustain the note A, the English horn presents a

fragment of the principal theme.

The tonic triad of C sharp minor prevails from

measure 55 to the end of the movement. A rhythmic C sharp

pedal (m. 60-62) is combined with a sustained C sharp pedal

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
230

in the solo cello and violas as the lower-strings bring the

movement to a quiet close.

The third and final movement, Molto allegro e_

appassionato, is in sonata-allegro form. Like the first

movement, it begins with a presentation by the upper winds

and strings of an angular figure that opens with a ninth and

quickly contracts:

33
Ex. 115

Repeated minor and major seconds sounding in the low flutes

and a harmonic ostinato-like pattern in the cellos and

timpani supply a rhythmic background to the principal theme

that follows in the solo cello in measure 6 (see Example 116).

This theme, which is partly derived from the introductory

passage, shows a marked relationship to the principal melodic

material of both the first and second movements.

33. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
231

34
Ex. 116
a . t e m p o c )? l3 2
J=J
ffl
& T
yj-iazk
_ '4-^r

n
t
f e J j U tJ j

In the first three measures (see Example 116, m. 1-3) the

head motive is based on the contraction of the interval of a

ninth to a second by octave displacement. The emphasis on the

interval of a third and the chordal outline of a minor

seventh in measure 6, particularly, draw attention to the

close thematic unity with the first movement (see Example

108, measures 4 and 5) and of the second movement (see

Example 113). The material that appears under the second

bracket in the above example is derived from the introductory

passage.

The over-all key of the finale is A minor with a

decided emphasis on the submediant triad, F major. The

chordal structures are somewhat more complex than those of

the previous movements because of the more frequent use of

34. Ibid,

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
232

the intervals of a ninth and second. A prominent

characteristic of this movement is the extended use of

ostinato figures. The second theme area, where a chaconne-

like bass is repeated eleven times, is particularly note

worthy in this respect.

The solo cello begins a second statement of the

theme (m. 21) that is completed by the orchestra (m. 27-34),

which then deals with the first half of the theme over a

rhythmic ostinato figure in the second violins, stressing

the tonic and subdominant areas of A minor (m. 34-42). Anti-

phonal treatment of the head of the theme between the

orchestra and solo cello (m. 42-60) leads to the transitional

section in measure 6 3 .

The transitional section (m. 63-107) consists of

fragments of the principal theme treated by both the solo

instrument and the orchestra. The tonality of P is retained

up to measure 71, shifting then to G from measure 71 to 79.

From this point to the grand pause in measure 108 the tonal

centers remain uncertain. The head motive of the principal

theme played by the full orchestra brings this part of the

movement to a close on the note B flat; a grand pause

follows immediately in measure 108.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
233

The second theme, which is introduced by the solo

cello after the grand pause, is presented over a chaconne-

like bass that is repeated eleven times during the course of

this section:

35
Ex. 117

SaloCell* .

f j, t d i z ^ rr.sk - Jbd j

r ~ r

etc

if r

In the fourth and ninth repetitions, the first note of the

repeated bass pattern is changed to G flat.

The tonal center throughout this area (m. 109 c.

168) is G. Although the Aeolian mode is the most prominent,

the Phrygian and major modes on G are also used. There are

two complete statements of the second theme, the first by the

solo instrument, the second shared by the solo cello, horns,

and trumpets. At measure 159 the full orchestra begins an

incomplete presentation of the theme ending on a fermata

35. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
234

chord in measure 164, after which the solo cello plays a

cadenza-like passage leading to the development section at

measure 1 7 1 .

In the development section (m. 171-276), which is

entirely based on the principal theme, the technical capac

ities of the cello are further exploited. It divides itself

into three general areas, of which the first (m. 171-221)

begins in B minor with some emphasis on the submediant area.

After fragmentary statements of the theme in the woodwinds

and brass, the solo cello plays a rapid eighth-note pattern

culminating in triple stops on the notes C, G, and D. This

chord C serves as the tonal center as the first trumpet be

gins an abbreviated statement of the theme (m. 187-191).

From measure 194 to 206, the intervals of a major second


.b b m .
(G A , F G, and E Tr) serve to orient the harmonyas

the solo cello emphasizes the descending minor second thatis

associated with the head of the theme. This is followed by

a dominant prolongation in the key of A (m. 209-212), in

which the horn and solo cello stress the interval of a

diminished tenth (B flat down to G sharp) under a sustained

pedal on E in the violins. In its more simple forms, this

interval is a diminished third or an augmented sixth. It is

treated here as a diminished third, resolving to the note A

(A major) at measure 213, a relationship similar to that used

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
235

at the close of the first movement see m. 362. The key of

A major is quickly dissolved, and from measure 215 to 231 the

tonal center Is uncertain.

The second part of the development section (m. 222-

237)* which is based primarily on the second half of the

theme (see Example 116, m. 14-18), employs canonic imitation

in stretto. The key of C major is reached at measure 231

where there is an effective antiphonal contrast between the

orchestra and the solo cello.

In the last moto-perpetuo-like part of the develop

ment section (m. 237-276), the soloist is again given an

opportunity to display his technical prowess. The strings

and winds provide mere rhythmic punctuation to the moving

eight-note patterns in the solo instrument. It is un

necessary to discuss in detail the thematic material that is

used in the solo part, since its derivation is usually quite

clear; however, because of the transitional nature of this

part the tonal centers are less obvious. The significant

root movement of chords is from B flat (m. 238-240) to C (m. 241

244), moving then to A at measure 245, and to D from measures

253-260. A kind of enharmonic dominant prolongation follows

at measure 269 as the flute and clarinet add an ostinato

pattern to the solo part. The tone A flat that appears in

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
236

both the flute and cello parts is enharmonically G sharp,

the leading tone of A minor; the E flat in the flute part

is enharmonically D sharp, the altered fourth scale degree

of A minor, which provides a leading tone to the dominant

scale degree. The chord outline in this passage may be

considered as an incomplete, altered dominant seventh of A

minor (EG^BD^), or as an altered leading tone triad (G^BD^).

The key of A minoris anticipated momentarily in measures

273 and 275being firmly restored at measure 277 as the

principal theme is restated.

Although the recapitulation section is somewhat

abbreviated, it follows a regular scheme. It is summarized

in the following diagram:

Recapitulation

Principal theme Second theme


m. 277-292 m. 293-338
A minor P > A minor
Exact restatement of theme With the exception
by the orchestra (m. 277- of the key centers
291). Solo cello is not and minor changes
used. in orchestration
this section is
identical with the
original second
theme area
(m. 109-164).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
237

The coda (m. 339-412), although based on both the

principal and subordinate themes, places particular emphasis

on the he-"'- of the subordinate theme. It begins in the solo

cello with cadenza-like passage made up of triplet figures.

While this solo passage is somewhat suggestive of the

principal theme, the reference is uncertain. Following the

continuation of the triplet pattern in the flute and clarinet

(m. 363-366), the oboe introduces a fragment of the second

theme in diminution (m. 372) stressing the tonic of A minor:

Ex. 11836
Obee fete
nn ~pi Fp 11d V i a 1 f f l l 1- - - 1h r
S JkJ W!J ---- 4

wj

' 3
=A

This pattern serves as an ostinato against the triplet

figuration in the solo cello and the low woodwinds (m. 373-

382). A dramatic clirax is achieved at measure 397 as the

eighth-note chord (whole tone chord) in the full orchestra

gives way to the sustained tone A in the solo cello. The

cello alone, again stressing the second theme fragment, leads

to the closing section of the coda (m. 400) where the upper

winds and strings present an almost literal statement of the

3 6 . Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
238

angular introductory motive in diminution. The movement

comes to a close on the note A in measure 412.

Although there is no direct transfer of material

from one movement to another, the marked relationship of the

principal thematic material serves to unify the concerto.

This relationship stems from the stress that 1s placed on the

interval of a third and the chordal outline of a minor

seventh. The principal theme of the first movement emphasizes

the ascending and descending interval of a third and the

minor seventh chord outline (see Example 108, m. 3, 5-11).

The poetic song in a Siciliano-like .rhythm that serves as

the principal melody of the second movement is based primarily

on the interval of a third and the minor seventh chord on C

sharp (see Example 113). While the interval of a third and

the chordal outline are perhaps of secondary importance in

the principal theme of the finale, they nevertheless con

stitute a part of this theme.

The technique of deriving a theme through the ex

pansion or contraction of an interval (the head of the

principal theme of the finale is based on the contraction of

the interval of a ninth) was used in the Second Symphony

(principal theme of the first movement), which was written

one year before this concerto.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
239

The emphasis placed upon the submediant triad and

tonic with added sixth, which is particularly evident in the

first and third movements of this work, again show the

composer's prediliction for amalgamating two chords or sub

stituting one for the other.

Samuel Barber received an award for the Violon

cello Concerto in June of 1946. It was- publicly announced

in an article in the New York Times, which appeared on June

28, 1946. A short quotation from this article will conclude

the discussion of this work:

The 5th annual award of the Music Critic's Circle


of New York for the work of an American Composer,
considered exceptional among the orchestral com
positions performed for the first time in this
city during the season was won by Samuel Barber
for a concerto for Violoncello and Orchestra,
Op. 22, it was announced Wednesday by Miles
Kastendieck, president. 37

37. "Barber Concerto Gets Critics' Prize," New York Times


(June 28, 1946).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
240

Chapter VI

THE SYMPHONIES

First Symphony, Opus

After having won both the Pulitzer Prize and the

Prix de Rome in May 1 9 3 5 Barber sailed for Italy and


p
settled in the American Academy of Rome. It was here in

1936 that he wrote several songs, including "The Rain Has

Fallen" and "Sleep Now," and completed his first symphony.

For the latter work he again received the Pulitzer Prize

(April 1936), thus becoming the first composer so honored

two years in succession.3

According to the information in the score, this

symphony was first performed by the Augusteo Orchestra in


4
Rome (Adriano Theatre), December 13, 1936. It is interest

ing to read several comments about this performance that

appeared in the New York Times on the following day. The

1. "Samuel Barber Wins Two Awards," Musical Opinion (May 25,


1935), 27.

2. Nathan Broder, Samuel Barber (New York: G. Schirmer, Inc.,


1954), 30.

3. Ibid., 32.

4. "Barber Symphony Approved in Rome," New York Times


(December 14, 1936).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
241

critics felt that the work recalled the techniques of the

m o d e m German school, particularly those of Hindemith; they

expressed the view that the composer's harmonic and orchestral

resources were such that they atoned for a "not too happy"

contrast of brass and strings; and, finally, they believed

that the success of the work was due to its well-defined

theme, which was "robustly developed in a classical form."

While the symphony was warmly received by the Italian

audience, it was not an unalloyed success one elderly

person is said to have remarked loudly as she left the


c
theatre, "that young man should have been strangled at birth.1"

In the year 1937 Barber became the recipient of

another coveted honor when Arthur Rodzinski, who at that

time was the conductor of the Cleveland Orchestra, disclosed

in an article in the New York Times that he would include

Barber's "Symphony in One Movement" in his repertory for the


7
Salzburg Festival that summer.1 The performance of this work

in July, 1937 marked the first time that an American's music

5. Ibid.

6. Madeleine Goss, Modern Music Makers (New York: E.P.


Dutton & Co., Inc., 1952), 397^

7. "Salzburg Will Hear American Symphony," New York Times


(May 2, 1937).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
^ 242

o
had ever been played at this festival.

The first American performance of this work, as

indicated in the score, was given by the Cleveland Orchestra,

Arthur Rodzinski conducting, on January 22, 1937, in

Cleveland, Ohio. The first New York performance was given

in an afternoon concert at Carnegie Hall on March 25, 1937,

with Arthur Rodzinski conducting the New York Philharmonic


9
Symphony Orchestra; the piece was warmly applauded and the

critics, too, were receptive. Olin Downes stated that while

the symphony was thematically rather dry, the "Gifted young

musician of twenty-six was seeking and gradually discovering

means of self-expression.

About 1942 the composer made several revisions of

the original score, the scherzo section particularly being


11
almost entirely rewritten. The revised version of this

work will, of course, be used in the formal analysis that

follows.

8. Broder, 3 3 .

9. "Work by Samuel Barber Played by Philharmonic Symphony


Orchestra, Premiere here of his 'Symphony in One
Movement, New York Herald Tribune (March 26, 1937).

10. Olin Downes, New York Times (March 26, 1937).

11. Broder, 80.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
243

Although termed a symphony In one movement, it is

actually divided into four clear-cut parts corresponding to

the movements of the classical pattern. The entire work is

constructed from three subjects that are introduced in the

exposition. The second part of the symphony (Scherzo) is

based upon the principal subject; tne third part (Andante

tranquillo) is derived from an augmentation of the second

subject and fragments of the first; the fourth part (Finale)

is a passacaglia, whose theme is based upon the principal

subject. The chief unifying feature is, obviously, this

close thematic correlation between all parts; no melodic or

thematic material can be found that does not bear a dis

cernible relationship to the three subjects alluded to

above.

The opening section, an Allegro ma non troppo

(m. 1-137)* begins with a chord based on the notes E, F

sharp, and B that establishes the tonality of E minor. The

principal subject (A) that is introduced by the winds and

strings in measure 2 is composed of three distinct figures,

which are used both together and separately as the symphony

progresses:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
244

Ex. 11912

This material, which is repeated and developed until measure

20, gives way to a bridge passage (in. 20-28) that modulates

to P sharp minor.

The lyrical second subject (B, m. 28-42) is stated

by the English horn and viola in the new tonal center of P

sharp minor:

13
Ex. 120

In the closing measures of this section (nr. 36-42) strong


2
reference is made to the a fragment of the first subject

(see Example 119, measure 2).

12. Copyright 1943, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

13. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
245

The viola and clarinets begin a transitional

section (m. 43-60) with an ascending sixteenth-note pattern,

which is later taken over by the upper strings (m. 49-57) and

treated in imitation. As the strings and the oboe begin short


1 2
motives based on the a and a fragments of the principal

subject (m. 58-60), the flutes, piccolo, and clarinets take

up the imitative scale treatment.

The third subject (m. 61-76), which has the

character of a closing theme, is centered in B minor with a

strong emphasis on the submediant area:

14
Ex. 121

fl)24>k
via. i* Jv*i

The instrumentation is reduced to a lone P sharp in the

double basses in the last measure of this section. This tone

slides down a half step to P natural in measure 77, the tonal

center for the beginning of the development section.

Although the symphony from this point on is a

14. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
246

development of the material already presented, the section

from measure 77 to 121 has the characteristics of a develop

ment in the traditional sense. While all three subjects

appear, the principal subject is treated more extensively

than the others. This section divides itself into two

general areas, of which the first (m. 77- 2-09) deals with

fragments of the subjects in imitation, diminution, mirror

ing, and combinations thereof. The tonal center on F is

retained from measure 77 to 96 with both the major and minor

modes on P being used. The tonal level moves up a half step

to G flat (m. 98-107), which gives way to the minor dominant

of C (m. 108) that leads to the tonic of C minor as the

second part of this section begins in measure 1 0 9 .

Fragments of the first subject appear in the

bassoons and brass over rhythmic ostinato patterns (which

are based on the first subject also) in the woodwinds and

strings throughout the second part (m. 109-121). The key of

C minor is kept until measure 118, the rest of the section

being in B flat minor. The tonic chord of B flat minor acts

as a pivot for the modulation to E flat major at the point

where the concluding section begins (m. 122).

There is no recapitulation in this part of the

symphony; instead, a transitional section serves both to

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
247

round out the first section and to lead to the Scherzo. A

modulation from E flat major to B flat major is made and

this part of the work comes to a close on the note B flat

(m. 137).

The Scherzo (m. 138-437) has the characteristics


1 1 2 2
of a sonata form (A B Development A B Coda). Although

the material that is used in the subordinate area (B) is

derived from the principal subject that begins the movement,

the changes in key and character are enough to make a

differentiation possible.

The first part of the exposition section (A1,

m. 138-179) is a small ternary form in itself. As the

kettledrum softly intones the note B flat, the first violins

alone introduce the a1 section, being later imitated by the

second violins at the minor tenth below (m. 142):

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
248

15
Ex. 122
r . A\W ?ro v *o lt* J.= i n
VWrR|g VjLmftw

etc 1

The melodic material in the b section (m. 156-168) is played

by the solo clarinet as the tonal center shifts to C flat

(Neapolitan area of B flat major):

Ex. 12316

The principal subject (a2, m. 168-1 78) is restated by the

oboe, imitated this time by the bassoon beginning in measure

173. A transitional passage (m. 179-192), whose material is

derived from the b part of the first section leads to the

key of F Dorian and the beginning of the subordinate area

15. Ibid.

16. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
249

(ra. 193-223). Here the melodic material is taken from the

b section (see Example 123); there is a shift to the dominant

key of F, along with increased instrumentation and modifica

tion of the accompanying figures. As the horns and woodwinds

restate the B melody in measure 209 the tonality shifts

temporarily to D flat, but in measure 224, where the develop

ment section begins, the key of F is restored.

The development section (m. 224-294) is limited to

fragments of the principal subject material. The tonal move

ment is as follows:

F ------- D m i n o r ------- } F
m. 224-255 m. 256-276 m. 277-294

A dominant prolongation in the key of B flat major is

apparent from measure 289 to 294, but it is deceptively re

solved to B minor as the recapitulation begins in measure

295- The tonal level of each part of the recapitulation

section is one-half step higher than that of the exposition.

2
The restatement of the principal subject (A ) omits

the a1 and b fragments of the original ternary form, being


2
represented by a single appearance of a in B minor. The

section may be summarized as follows:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
250

2
A Transitional Passage B2
m. 295-304 m. 305-326 m 327-361
B^minor 1/2 step higher and W > D
a only more extended than Literal restate-
(seeExample 122). the original passage ment except for
(m. 179-192). keys.

The coda (m. 362-412) undertakes an expansive

treatment of the a^ motive of the principal subject in the

bass (see Example 119* measure 1). The principal subject of

the Scherzo returns in the Epilogue (m. 413-437) to bring the

movement to a close in C.

The third section, an Andante tranquillo (m. 438-

518), is a closed three-part form (A1BA2 ).1^ In the A1

section, the melodic material consists of an augmentation of

the second subject (B) of the symphony (see Example 120).

It Is heard as an extended oboe solo against a quiet string

accompaniment augmented by the harp. While the key of C

sharp minor predominates in the muted strings and harp, the

solo line in the oboe borrows freely from the parallel modes

on C sharp. Following a cadence on the tonic triad of C

sharp major (m. 465), the first cello plays a short linking

phrase that leads to the beginning of the B section at

measure 466.

17. Cedric Thrope Davie, Musical Structure and Design


(London: Dennis Dobson & Co., 1943), 35 .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
251

The material of the short B part (m. 466-485) is


1 o
based on the a and aJ motives of the principal subject (see

Example 119). As in the previous section, the melodic and

harmonic materials show a free interchange of mode over a


18
single tonic. The G center at the outset of this section

gives way to A at measure 472, the remaining part (m. 477-

485) being centered around G flat.

2
The third section, A , is centered in C throughout.

It consists of a more extended expression of the second sub-


2
ject with reference to the a fragment of the principal sub

ject (m. 492-493, tuba) and also a1 (m. 504-505, trumpets).

It comes to a close in measure 518 on a C major triad.

The concluding section (m. 519-620) consists of

variations over thirteen statements of a vpassacaglia theme


1 2
that is based upon the a and a motives of the principal

subject followed by a coda, whose material is also based on

the same motives. After a short three-measure introduction,

which sustains the E minor triad, the passacaglia theme is

first played by the double basses and cellos.

18. John Vincent, The Diatonic Modes in M o d e m Music (New


York: Mills Music, Inc., 1951)* "Interchangeability
of Mode."

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
252

Ex. 124 19

Vc.4D.B.

itzAzz-z - z
pp espr.

The following diagram summarizes the section:

Passacaglia

Statement 1 Statements 2 Statement 7 Statement 8


through 6
m. 522-527 m. 528-557 m. 558-563 m. 564-569
(See Example Chorale treat More direct Reference to
124) ment of melody reference to a3 in bass
suggestive of and a . clarinet and
a1 motive. Strings. bassoon.
Winds and
Strings.

Statement 9 Statements 10- Statements 12-


11 13
m. 570-575 m. 576-587 m. 588-599
Reference to Increase in This is the climax
B subject in tension; al of this section; B
strings; a1 in trumpets. subject in strings
in brass. a1 in augmentation
in brass.

The coda (m. 600-620), which is composed of the a^

and a 2 motives, provides a brilliant conclusion to the

symphony. A dominant prolongation (m. 604-608) leads to the

19. Copyright 1943 , G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
253

tonic triad of E minor, which is emphasized thereafter to

the end.

It has been shown that the unifying feature of

this symphony is the thematic unity between its sections.

This compensates for the vagueness of tonality that is

characteristic of many parts of the work. The following

diagram shows the tonal movement from section to section:

Overall Tonality, E minor

Opening Section Scherzo Andante Passacaglia


Begins in E Begins in B tranquillo Begins in E
minor, ends in flat major, Begins in C minor, ends
B flat major. ends in C sharp major, in E minor.
major. ends in C
major.

Second Symphony, Opus 19

Samuel Barber was inducted into the Army on


20
September 4,- 1942, being assigned to a Special Service

division after the completion of his basic training. After

several months he was transferred to the Army Air Forces,

where his commanding officers permitted and encouraged him


21
to compose. Soon after he wrote the Commando March for

20. "Symphony Composer in Army," New York Herald Tribune


(September 4, 1942).

21. Broder, 36.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
254

band (1943)* he was commissioned by the Air Forces to write

this symphony .22 He began the work while at the Army Air

Field at Fort Worth, Texas, after having been flown in

various types of planes to absorb the feeling and atmosphere

of his s u b j e c t . F o l l o w i n g its completion early in 1944

(the first symphony had been written ten years earlier), the

work was performed, as "Symphony Dedicated to the Army Air

Forces," by the Boston Symphony Orchestra, Sergei


24
Koussevitzky conducting, on March 3 of that year. The

title of the work as it appears in the published edition is

Second Symphony.

After revision of the original score in 1947, it

was recorded in 1951 by the New Symphony Orchestra of London


25
with the composer conducting (London LPS 334). Although

the full score is now available for purchase, the orchestral

parts may be obtained only on rental from the publishers.

22. Ibid.

23. "Air Forces Symphony Presented" New York Times (March 5,


1944).

24. Broder, 37.

25. Ibid., 102.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
255

The symphony is in three movements scored for

large orchestra and piano. The first, Allegro ma non troppo,

is in sonata form. The interval of a second, which largely

contributes to the pervasive dissonance of the entire work,

is a conspicuous mark of the short three-measure introduction:

26
Ex. 125

Js31 * Piano

This is followed by the principal theme, in which the

pattern as it appears above is worked out horizontally. The

antecedent phrase:

^27
Ex. 126

the consequent phrase:

26. Copyright 1950, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

27. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
256

28
Ex. 127.

The chord outlines emphasize the intervals of a

ninth, seventh, and fourth. While it is possible to determine

the root of each chord throughout the principal thematic area

(m. 3-29 ), and the key of P sharp is hinted at, no definite

tonic is ever established. Following two statements of the

theme, the second of which is somewhat modified and extended,

the first section comes to a close on a major-minor seventh

chord on C (m. 28).

The long transition section (m. 29-100) divides

itself into two general areas. The first (m. 29-56) is

centered in D minor and includes an ostinato figure:

28. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
257

Ex. 12829

A g ita to
Vt&.JWc.,0-8v ru in tvu
J

i f U

over which Transition Motive 1 is heard in the clarinets and

bassoons (m. 30-31 ):

30
Ex. 129

Ct.,Bsi ei.,8unj.

V- :i.-
r- V i 4 --

This motive, which is extended in subsequent appearances,

and the ostinato figuration (m. 33-37> 41-48), constitute

the material of the first part. The second part (m. 57-

100) is centered around P. While the ostinato from part 1

is still referred to in this section, the main interest is

centered on a new motive, Transition Motive 2, which has

29. Ibid.

30. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
258

rhythmic ties with Transition Motive 1:

31
Ex. 130

SeXarta-wJo

The repetition of Transition Motive 2 in the strings

(m. 78-84) brings about a nervous driving climax to this

entire section. The tension decreases from measures 92 to

100, as the piano and bassoon present imitative entries

based on Transition Motive 2 followed by the ostinato

figuration of part 1 in the second violins (m. 97-100).

The tonal center reverts to D (both the major and

minor mode on D are used) as the long second theme, first

played by the oboe, is introduced in measure 101:

31. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
259

32
Ex. 131

Sv*prt a tfcwipot m Tr**^aiUi

CK,

Trart*iTie*\ S'-t'lO'i

The head of the second theme is based on a chordal outline

with the repeated pattern in the strings showing a marked

relation to the ostinato figuration that was used in the

transitional section. Following the completion of the

theme by the solo oboe (m. 109), the first violins present

the antecedent phrase, being imitated in turn by the English

horn and tuba. The final abbreviated appearance of the

second theme in the cellos (m. 129-139) leads to the be

ginning of the closing theme area at measure 140, which is


2
a section based on the A fragment of the consequent phrase

of the principal subject (see Example 127* measure 2). This

leads to the closing theme proper in measure 176, still in

the key of D:

32. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
260

Ex. 13233
J.=fco

The exposition is brought to a close with the head motive of

the principal theme (see Example 126, A^) leading to a B major

triad in measure 2 1 9 .

The first part of the development section (m. 220-

280) deals with the principal and subordinate thematic

material, while the interval of the second is presented in

the upper winds and piano. From measures 28l to 333 the
2
emphasis is placed on the A fragment of the principal theme

(see Example 127), the ostinato figuration of the transitional

section, and Transition Motive 2. In the concluding part

(m. 3^0-360), the introductory seconds begin to pile up in

the winds, brass, and piano, and, as the tension mounts to


p
a high peak (m. 357)> the trumpets cut through with the A

fragment leading to the recapitulation at measure 361.

The tonal centers in this section are short-lived,

and, indeed, often made obscure by the marked emphasis on the

33. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
261

interval of a second, its inversion the seventh, and its

expansion the ninth. The important tonal movement appears

to be as follows:

Tonal Centers on:

Introductory
Interval of
a 2nd,
B Eb ---> p# or c# + c -> E > JJpJr
m. 220 m. 253 m. 265-280 m. 281 m. 311 m. 357-360

The recapitulation section (m. 361-459) follows a

regular scheme, but omits the extended transition section of

the exposition, as may be seen from the following diagram:

Principal 2nd Theme Closing Area


Theme
A of P. Closing kd of P.
Theme Theme Theme
nu 361-378 m. 379-427 m. 427-443 m. 444-454 m. 454-459
Restated Restated by Restated by Restated by Limited to
by the the cellos the strings; the just the
violins with A2 somewhat woodwinds A2 frag
and fragment modified and brass ment.
violas. of principal and (m. 444- Strings
Tonality theme in condensed. 447), re and
is not upper strings, inforced wood
defined; Centered in by the winds .
indefinite F#. strings
F#? (m. 448-451).
Extended re
statement .
4t
Centered in F" throughout

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
262

Stretto entrances of the head of the principal theme

throughout the entire orchestra mark the beginning of the coda

at measure 460, which deals with parts of the antecedent phrase

of the principal theme, the rhythmic ostinato from the transi

tion section (see Example 128), and, in the closing measures,

the introductory material. The tonal center of F sharp is

clearly defined by a sustained P sharp pedal and the emphasis

that is placed on the tone F sharp in the ostinato passages.

The movement comes to a close on the dominant tone C sharp

held in the first and second violins.

The second movement, Andante un poco mosso, is a


1 2
three-part form (A BA ) whose material falls naturally into

a 5/4 meter. The ostinato principal is utilized throughout

the movement by the constant repetition of the introductory

material, which begins in the muted, divided, low solo strings

and piano, establishing the dark, eerie mood that predominates:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
263

34
Ex. 133

Avi<Ja.ntt , \A Y i poc.0 mosjo


Vc.,0.6.(cn pia.

T
The over-all tonality of this movement is A minor. While

some fourth chords are used, the minor triad and minor

seventh chords are of particularly frequent occurrence;

however, the major seventh chord is also used, along with

occasional ninths and elevenths.

The expansive main theme (m. 8-21) of which a part

appears in Example 134, is started by the English horn.

Ex. 13435

)
8J c.


wiolto u e r ,

34. Ibid.

35. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
264

It closes in measure 21 on the tonic triad of A minor, being

followed by a phrase extension (m. 21-24) ending in the sub

dominant area. As the strings take up the ostinato figuration

in measure 26, the tonal center begins to shift toward E

minor. In measure 28 th.^ "horn enters with another statement

of the main theme in the key of E minor, the last phrase of

the melody (m. 37-40) being taken over by the trombone. The

passage from measure 40 to 49 serves as a transition to the

short B part in measure 50, where the material of the intro

duction is intensified (m. 50-61). The tonal center is E

flat minor with the submediant triad or seventh (C^E^G^B13)

frequently substituting for the tonic. The interval of a

second is again emphasized by the trombones in the closing

measures (m. 60-62). The key of A minor is restored as the


p
A section begins (m. 62-84) with the E flat clarinet

rhythmically intoning the note A.^^

Unlike A1, this section does not depart from the

key of A minor. The restatement of the main melody appears

36. Broder, 8l. In the original version of this movement the


score called for a specially constructed electronic in
strument to provide the rhythmic call of a radio beam,
keeping the navigator on course.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
265

in the strings, except for the last phrase, which is played

by the tuba, whlle the woodwinds and brass continue the

introductory ostinato pattern. The movement closes on the

note A in the low strings and trumpets.

A vivid but terse account of the finale of the

symphony is given by Henri-Louis De La Grange in Contrepoints.

He states that it is introduced in the form of a toccata, in

which the phrases mount like spirals, and, further, that in

spite of its violent character and expansiveness, its'solid


57
architecture is in the strict form of theme and variation.

The entire movement, one of Barber's longest (528

measures), is constructed on two motives:

31. Henri-Louis De La Grange, "D1Amerique, Un Compositeur


Americain Independant: Samuel Barber," Contrepoints,
No. 4 (Mai - Juin 1946), 65-6 6 .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
266

38
Ex. 135 Motive A

P r*jto ;
VIwt Via

i
f detach

39
Ex. 136 Motive B

JJJ concert pi+cU) n oct&vti


I
r i "> ' r I S&i \

and a theme:

38. Copyright 1950, by G. Schirmer.

39. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
267

40
Ex. 137

U k T
$ < ix

Following the unison declamation of the spiralling Motive A

in the strings (note that the second half is an almost exact

mirror of the first), the horns introduce Motive B over a

fragment of it, which is bracketed in Example 135. Note that

Motive B shows a marked relationship to the ostinato pattern

that was used in the transition section of the first movement

(see Example 128, the double bass part). Canonic treatment of

Motive A in the strings with a part of Motive B appearing in

the bassoon and trombones establish the tonality of F sharp

and lead to the main body of the movement at measure 54.

This part of the Finale (m. 54-224) is a set of

seven melodically fixed variations on a theme (see Example

1 37) followed by a short transitional phrase leading to the

fugato section. The woodwinds and horns alternate anti-

phonally with the strings during the presentation of the

theme (m. 54-75). The tonal center of F sharp is retained

40. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
I

268

throughout this section. The following diagrams will provide

a synopsis of the variations.

Var. 1 Var. 2 Var. 3 Var. 4


m. 76-97 m. 98-119 m. 120-141 m. 142-163
Theme: Theme: Theme: Theme:
Piano, cellos Strings and Flutes, Strings
and double English horn. piccolo, and only.
bass. piano; clarinet,
trumpets, and
trombone share
theme (m. 132-
141).
Centered in F"^--------

SIGNIFICANT DETAILS
Staccato, Imitative Rhythmic treat Head of theme
pizzicato treatment of ment of theme. in violins,
treatment theme in Counter violas,
of theme. strings. melody based against
Sustained Staccato in on B Motive tail of theme
tones in woodwinds. (trumpet, in 2nd viola,
trumpets clarinet, oboe cellos and
and horns. and horn). double bass.

Transitional
Var. 5 Var. 6 Var. 7 Phrase
m. 164-180 m. 181-196 m. 197-216 m. 217-224
Theme: Theme: Theme: Made up of
Brass Freely alter Pizzicato in counter
Centered ed in viola, later melody of
in F . strings and in 2nd violins. variation 7 .
tympani. Centered Centered in
Centered around F .
around B
minor.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
269

SIGNIFICANT DETAILS
Pyramiding of Tympani answer- Appearance Counter melody
theme in "brass. ing strings. of 2 new of variation 7
counter in woodwinds
melodies, and strings.
of which Accented
both eighth-notes
employ lead to
chromatic fugato at
patterns. measure 2 2 5 .
Elaboration
of above
pattern
with accent
on interval
of 2nd.

The fugato section (m. 225-321) is based on the

theme (see Example 137) and Motive A (see Example 135). Of

importance in this section is the combination of the theme

with Motive A, the latter stated as a canon at the octave:

_4l
Ex. 138

The A Motive itself is subjected to variation (m. 321-333),

41. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
270

replacing the theme temporarily. Following a fortissimo C

major chord (m. 333-337), a modified version of the A Motive

leads to a free recapitulation of some of the variations.

Although the orchestration is somewhat different, measures

345 to 352 are similar to the original theme presentation

(m. 54-62); measures 353 to 366 are comparable to variation

four (m. 142-163); measures 366 to 388 are similar to

variation one (m. 76-97 ); measures 389 to 392 suggest the

beginning of variation two (m. 98-101).

Canonic treatment of the tail of the theme (see

Example 137, measures 58 to 61) carried out by the full

orchestra (m. 393-406) leads to a fortissimo restatement of

Motive B in the horns (m. 419-428). As the instrumentation

thins out and the excitement subsides, the coda begins

quietly over an extended F sharp pedal (m. 437). It is made

up of Motive A combined with the theme, Motive B being

partially suggested by the cellos and double bass:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
271

42
E x. 139

13 Tranauitto J=>

B Motive

The mood abruptly changes In the concluding part of the coda

(m. 488-528) with the return of the Allegro molto. Prom

measure 488 to 509> both Motives A and B (strings and wood

winds) are combined with the first part of the theme (brass,

tympani, and strings). A fragment of the theme, which begins

in the low brass and rises to a dramatic climax in the full

orchestra (m. 508-515), is followed by a last reference to

Motive B in the tympani and piano. The symphony ends on a

fortissimo P sharp chord, tne underlying tonality of the

entire work.

The angular melodies of this symphony, its pulsating

ostinati and the spiralling figure of its Finale, give it a

decided mechanistic power. In addition to being far larger in

42. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
272

scope than the First Symphony, it is consistently more

dissonant and the tonal centers are less clearly defined.

While the subject matter that was introduced in the exposi

tion section of the First Symphony was used throughout the

whole work, the only marked transfer of material here is to

be discerned in the close relationship of the ostinato

figuration of the first movement with that of Motive B of

the Finale.

That the shaping of the material was affected by

the war and the general atmosphere of Air Force camps and

airplanes, is not denied by the composer himself. He

does, however, frown upon the "aeronautical" interpretations

that commentators sometime dwell upon, and "wishes it to be

listened to as a purely abstract work.

43. Broder, 8l.

44. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
273

Chapter VII

THE MISCELLANEOUS ORCHESTRAL WORKS

Overture to The School for Scandal, Opus 5_

According to a "program note" in the orchestral

score the Overture to The School for Scandal, Opus 5* was

suggested by Richard Brinsley Sheridan's drama of the same

title. While the work reflects the rather comical, sardonic

atmosphere of the drama, no attempt seems to have been made

to portray any of Sheridan's characters.

Although Nathan Broder states that this work was


1
written in 1931* the note in the published score and other

sources indicate the year 1932. It was first performed by

the Philadelphia Orchestra, Alexander Smallens conducting, in


2
1933. In the same year, Samuel Barber received his second
3
B e a m s prize of $1,200 for this work.

Excepting, possibly, the Serenade for String

Quartet or String Orchestra, Opus 1, this Overture is the

1. Nathan Broder, Samuel Barber (New York: G. Schirmer, Inc.,


1955)* 1 0 0 .

2. Ibid.

3. "Composer Wins Again," New York Times (April 12, 1933).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
274

first orchestral work by Barber, being scored for a full body

of brass, percussion, woodwinds and strings. It is in regular

sonata-allegro form preceded by a short, strident introduction

and concluded by a coda in rapid fugato. The chords through

out the overture are mainly built in thirds; the major-minor

seventh, minor seventh, diminished-minor seventh, and

diminished seventh chords are used. The harmonic progressions

emphasize root movement by fifths and thirds. The over-all


A
tonality is D minor, but the major mode on D also plays an

Important rSle.

In the introductory measures, a spirited rhythmic

figure is presented by the upper woodwinds over a pol/chordal

background consisting of a D major triad in the strings

against an E flat minor triad in the trumpets. This figure

(see Example 140) appears again in transitional sections and

the closing measures of the coda.

Ex. 140^
' Alltjro molTo i uivice ffl

4. Copyright 1941, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
275

The harmonic tension is soon abated, giving way to

a D minor triad in measure 8. The unusually long principal

theme (see Example l4l) is introduced by the first violins

in measure 11, while the clarinet and viola provide a series

of descending pedal points that stress the minor dominant

and mediant triads of D minor;

Ex. l4l5

I Vln.1. ' > s G1 f- j * n_

it extends from measure 11 to measure 30. (Note that the

second violins imitate the first violins at the octave from


i
measure 25 to 27.) The section from measure 30 to 36 acts

as a linking passage that leads to another appearance of the

principal thematic material at measure 36, now abbreviated,

freely transformed, and marked by free imitative treatment

between the lower strings and winds along with an inverted

5. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
276

dominant pedal in the first violins and tympani. This leads

to a final, again modified, statement of the principal

thematic material by the strings, beginning in measure 46

as the horns and woodwinds provide a rhythmic tonic pedal.

The principal theme area is thereby brought to a close at

letter B, measure 62, on the tonic triad of D minor. The

cadence on the tonic triad, which actually occurs in measure

5 7 , is extended by repetition.

A transitional section leading to the subordinate

theme area extends from letter B (m. 62) to letter C, measure

85. It consists of a series of ascending and descending

scale patterns and arpeggiated figures, which lead, in

measure 80, to the rhythmic figure of the introduction. The

tonality of this transitional section is unstable from measure

62 to measure 7 8 . At measure 78 the dominant note of F major,

the key of the subordinate theme area, is reached and

prolonged to measure 8 5 .

The time signature changes to 3/4 as the second

theme is introduced by the oboe beginning with the anacrusus

to letter C, measure 8 5 . The medium-low register of the

oboe seems appropriate to this lyrical, smoothly flowing

theme, for which the strings supply a simple chordal back

ground :

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
277

Ex . 1426

(7

t p

This is a thirteen-measure sentence whose antecedent phrase

(m. 85-8 9 ) is followed by two responsive phrases (m. 90-93

and 9^-98). Note the chordal outlines that make up this

theme; many of Barber's songs and instrumental compositions

contain chordal melodies.

An abbreviated reappearance of the second theme

in the first violins comes to a close at letter D, measure

109, on a half-cadence on the dominant triad.

The clarinet presents the closing theme over

accompanying chords in the strings as the meter reverts to

9/8:

6. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
278

Ex. 1437

This passage, still in F major, comes to a close on a plagal

cadence in measure 119. After a two-measure linking passage

played by the solo flute over a rhythmic repetition of the

F major triad, the upper strings give a second, somewhat

modified statement of the closing theme, which leads to the

rhythmic, introductory figure (see Example 140) at measure

135 that concludes the closing theme area in measure 140.

The strings repeat the tonic triad of F major under

a pedal point on the notes C flat and E flat in the oboe and

trumpets (m. 140-142). This sustained pedal alone leads to

the beginning of the development section at letter E, measure

145. A subtle change of mode takes place, as the development

begins, when the pedal on C flat and E flat is replaced by a

tremelo on the notes B and D natural in the clarinet.

Extending from measure 145 to measure 179* the

development section deals only with material from the

7. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
279

principal thematic area. From measure 145 to measure 166

fragmentary references to the principal theme are shared by

the strings, woodwinds, and brass; next, a very free adapta

tion of a part of the principal theme is presented by the

bassoons, brass and tympani supported by a short rhythmic .

ostinato figuration in the woodwinds and strings (m. 170-175);

a concluding sixteenth-note ascending and descending pattern

(m. 175-179)t which achieves a dramatic climax, paves the

way for the recapitulation. While this section begins in

B minor, the tonic key of D minor is quickly restored in

measure 154. A dominant prolongation is maintained from

measure 159 to measure 180.

As the recapitulation section follows the usual

scheme, a diagram will suffice.

m. 180-194 m. 195-215 m. 216-239 m. 240-265


Recap: Prin. Recap: Trans. Recap: Sub Recap: Cl.
theme Sec. (Almost theme theme
D minor, literal) D major, D major,
strings. Material English Hr., Clarinets,
Tonic Pedal transposed Strings. Strings.
W.W. & Brass. down a 3rd.
Tonally un
stable, but
emphasizing
the subdominant
and submediant
areas of D
minor. A
dominant pro
longation in D
is evident from
measure 213 to
215.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
280

The coda (m. 266 to the end of the movement)

centers on D major, consisting of a short, rhythmic fugato

based on a diminution of the principal theme culminating in

the rhythmic figure of the introduction at measure 319. The

final cadence actually occurs at measure 317, but is extended

to measure 324 by repetition of the tonic triad. Further

extension results when the tonic triad gives way to a

unison D in the full orchestra, which brings the overture to

a close in measure 326.

Music for a Scene from Shelley, Opus 7

In the preface to the printed score the composer

states

In the summer of 1933 I was reading Shelley's


Prometheus Unbound. The lines in Act II, Scene
5, where Shelley indicates music, suggested this
composition. It is really incidental music for
this particular scene, and has nothing at all to
do with the figure of Prometheus.

The passage follows:

8. Copyright 1936, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
281

Panthea (to Asia):


...nor is it I alone,
Thy sister, thy companion, thine own chosen one,
But the whole world which seeks thy sympathy.
Hearest thou not sounds i' the air which speak the love
Of all articulate beings? Feelest thou not
The inanimate winds enamoured of thee? Listl (Music.

Prometheus Unbound, Act II, Scene 5^

The music was written while Barber was living at Cadegliano

in the Swiss Alps, and although completed in 1933* it was

first performed on March 23* 1935 by the New York

Philharmonic-Symphony Orchestra with Werner Janssen conduct

ing. The composer attributed the Prix de Rome award which

he later received to the orchestra's performance of this

work.11 Olin Downes, in an article in the New York Times,

praised the composer's "poetical feeling and instinct for

form," but stated that the epilogue after the climax was too

drawn out and that the principal theme was not the most

distinctive.1^ A performance of this work by the Helsinki

Municipal Orchestra in 1939* Martti Similia conducting,

brought favorable comments from the Finnish critics. They

9. Ibid.

10. Broder, 24, 27.

11. Ibid., 29.

12. Olin Downes, "Janssen Presents New Native Music," New York
Times (March 25* 1937).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
282

stated that the "work significantly weakened in Finland the

prejudice against American musical talent common throughout

Europe.n1^

While the score of this work can be bought, the

parts can be obtained only on rental from the publishers.

The only available recording at this time is issued by the

American Recording Society with Walter Hendl conducting, the

American Recording Society Orchestra (ARS-26).1^

The entire work is cast in a rounded AB scheme,

the material unfolding in the form of an arch. It begins in

B minor, pianissimo, with an introductory figure that is

treated in imitation by the muted and divided strings (see

Example 144). This pattern, although altered in subsequent

appearances, pervades most of the work.

13. New York Times (April 16, 1939).

14. American Recording Society, 100 Sixth Avenue, New York 13>
New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
283

Ex. 14415

(Note that the violin and viola play, the figure in mirror
form in measures 3 and 4.)

The chords throughout are built in thirds. Besides

the common triads, various types of seventh chords and an

occasional ninth chord are used. The minor-major seventh

chord is, however, especially frequent. The theme of the A

section (m. 5-33) is stated by the muted horns beginning in

measure 5:

15. Copyright 1936, G. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
284

Ex. 14516

a J-slO . v
)W **v\ to ri. CtMucrt f *W;

i-8

Following a modified appearance in the trumpets (m. 12-14),

the introductory material, treated in imitation by the full

string body, rises to a crescendo and the theme is repeated

in the strings, forte (m. 22-2 5 ) then mf and tt_ in the horns

without mutes (m. 26-32). The dynamic and rhythmic intensity

of the strings increases and, to a slightly faster tempo,

they usher in the B theme, fortissimo, at measure 3^ (see

Example 146).

Although the B section (m. 3^-80) begins on an

F major triad, it is centered around D. The first entry of

the theme is accompanied by the introductory figuration played

by the trumpets over sustained chords in the trombones and

tuba.

1 6 . Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
285

Ex. 1461?
/*:U1
m *
J h itfrjifffTtifr
# **r
1SL
sit

Prom measure 42 to measure 50,' the introductory material

itself becomes all-important. In addition to being incor

porated in the B theme in the violins, horn, and cellos, it

provides the basis for the ostinati in the woodwinds and

violas. Although the dynamic level is decreased to piano

following the trumpet entry (m. 51-54), the increase in

tempo and rhythmic activity are enough to maintain the

gradual rise in tension.

The final surge that leads to the peak of the arch

begins in measure 68 as the violins and cellos again take up

the B theme over the introductory figuration in the woodwinds

and horns. This is followed by a stretto imitation of the

first two measures of the theme, carried out by the strings

and woodwinds against the solo trumpet (m. 70-75). The

climax is reached in measure 80 over a dominant prolongation

in B minor. After a grand pause, the A theme is thundered

17. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
286

out by the full orchestra In the tonic key. A diminuendo

roll in the tympani, which serves to slacken the pace and

relax the tension, leads to another statement of the A theme

in the harp and muted strings. The music comes to a quiet

close with a sustained B major chord in the muted horns.

Essay for Orchestra, Opus 12

On November 5, 1938, the Essay for Orchestra was

given its premiere performance by Arturo Toscanini and the


"1ft
New York Philharmonic-Symphony Orchestra. It was the first

time that Toscanini had performed a work of an American

composer since he assumed leadership of the orchestra in

1 9 2 8 . This performance, which also included the Adagio for

Strings, provoked a rather heated discussion on the music of

Samuel Barber from coast to coast. Mr. Ashley Pettis, a

pianist, teacher, lecturer, and writer on music,20 was

undoubtedly responsible for the controversy that was carried

on in the newspapers for some time. He made the following

statements about this performance in an article which

18. New York Times (October 27, 1938).

19. Baker1s Biographical Dictionary of Musicians, 4th ed.


(New York: G. Schirmer, Inc., 1947)), 1105.

20. Ibid., 840.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
287

appeared in the New York Times:

There are important American composers and


important American Compositions of every type
of thought and tendency. But from "at least
one listener's point of view" neither Mr.
Barber nor his works may be justly so termed.
One listened in vain for evidences of youthful
vigor, freshness or fire, for use,of a
contemporary idiom (which was characteristic
of every composer whose works have withstood
the vicissitudes of time). Mr. Barber was
"authentic," "dull," "serious," music utterly
anachronistic as the utterance of a young man
of 28, A.D. 1938.21

Verna Arvey, a Los Angeles writer, and Gian-Carlo Menotti,

the prominent contemporary composer writing in New York, were

quick to defend Samuel Barber's music as well as Toscanini's

decision to include it on his program. While an evaluation

of Barber's music was not agreed upon during this discussion,

it was concluded that more American music should be played,

allowing the public to decide for itself which composer

merited the greatest applause.

This work, as well as the Second Essay, Opus 17,

which was written in 1942,22 develops reflective ideas in

much the same way the literary form does. It is cast in a

rounded AB scheme; a main theme and a triadic motive are

21. Ashley Pettis, "Important American Music," New York Times


(November 13, 1938).

22. Broder, 101.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
288

expounded briefly, then amplified, correlated, and brought to

their logical conclusion, after which an abbreviated restate

ment of the main theme and the triadic motive occurs.

The A section is sombre and intense. The main

theme is characterized by a figure consisting of the

ornamental resolution of the 9-8 suspension:

. 23
Ex. 147

_ A nilw t* ioitcnt&o 1
BU.*. * * * m
A ) J. m ---
til
A r
M

Vi. div.

m J8=
oa.div m m
r
m

The composer subtly creates an interplay between the uonic

and minor dominant triads of the key A minor; thus, at

the very outset, the double basses, divisi, begin with an

open fifth (A-E) over which the E minor triad is super

imposed. Note in measure 2 (see Example 147) the Neapolitan

chord of A minor. The harmonic progressions are largely

successions of common triads, the French augmented sixth

23. Copyright 1941, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
289

chord being structually important in the harmonic movement

of section A.

The main theme consists of a nine-measure sentence

divided into a four and a five measure phrase. The half-

cadence on the minor dominant, which is used at the end of

the antecedent and consequent phrases each time the main

theme appears, seems most fitting for the rather poetic,

melancholy mood of this section.

In measure 10 the violins begin a short consequent

phrase that leads to the second literal statement of the

main theme beginning in measure 1 5 . Note the French

augmented sixth chord in measure 14 (B^DEG^), which

intensifies the key of A minor. The horns state the

antecedent phrase of the main theme and the strings, conclude

the statement. In measure 24 another literal statement of

the short bridge passage (compare measures 10-15 with 24-29)

leads to an impassioned climax beginning in measure 2 9 :

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
290

Ex. 1482^

Poco *wi mjwJc

The horns and second trombone (m. 3 6 ) then present

a modified version of the antecedent phrase of the main theme

leading to the triadic motive stated in imitation by horns,

two trumpets, and trombone.

24. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
291

E x. 1 4 9 25

H nt.1,2 ptttU)
L is *
. 7 ^ to------------------------
tf:
5
TVjfcl,* f ,

j- f l "r r *

p .:
r cj f~*t3l1 r _

$*'<*
eV
a ----------
% w---------------- -

*
--------------------
,r-^
J m*r.
{(1 '

fc fe ***
y-faa
r - t o ...... .
[ f f f
p4

In the closing measures of section A (m. 5 0 ) the

trumpets and trombone begin a short motive based on the

familiar Interval of a third. The complete brass section,

reinforced by the piano, takes up this motive in measure 53,

after which the strings bring the A section to a quiet close

with a fragment of the main theme.

While the A section was predominantly grave in

character, section B (m. 61-286) moves very rapidly in a.

2 5 . Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
T 292

scherzo style; also, while the medium and low tessitura of

the orchestra prevailed in the A section, the B section

exploits the higher regions consistently. It is in this

scherzo setting that Barber's skill as an orchestrator

appears to special advantage: it is scored with a great

variety of colors, including effective pizzicato passages,

while the piano is treated as an instrument of the orchestra,

reinforcing the winds and strings in a very effective manner.

The thematic material is derived for the most part

from the triadic motive of the A section. The imitative

treatment that marked the appearance of this motive in

section A is again notable as section B begins:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
293

Ex. 15026

VU

PP 1e.-C

(Note that the encircled tones and the ascending figure in


the first violin outline the minor-major seventh chord on
C.)

While the B section begins in the key of E, the ever-changing

sequential patterns, which grow out of the triadic motive,

and the absence of definitive harmonic progressions often

create an ambiguity of tonal center. The chord structures,

as-in the A section, are largely triadic. It was pointed out

that the French augmented sixth chord was emphasized in the

harmony of section A; here in section B the minor-major

seventh chord (CEbGB) plays a leading role.

Although the thematic material from measure 6l to

26. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
294

141 is limited to the one motive, contrasts are achieved by

alternating the strings with woodwinds. The pizzicato

sections (note the passages from measure 86 to 93) also

provide color contrast. The significant tonal movement

from measure 6l to 141 is from E to B flat. Beginning with

the Introduction of the main theme of section A by the horn

and cellos against the triadic motive in the upper strings,

piano, and winds at measure 142, and extending to the end of

the first main part of section B at measure 192, B flat and

A flat minor act equally as tonal centers.

The second part of the B section is largely devoted

to ostinato figurations; while the muted second and fourth

horns sustain an E pedal, the piano, cellos, and double

basses begin a quarter-note rhythmic ostinato pattern, which,

extending from measure 192 to 204, is an ornamentation of the

E pedal. A second ostinato figure, actually an ornamentation

of the first, which is introduced by the clarinet in measure

195 and later reinforced by the flute and piano, points up the

note B. The following example will show the two ostinato

patterns:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
295

E x. 1 5 1 27

The encircled tones in the clarinet part in the above example

point out the three most important notes in this pattern, the

notes C sharp and A sharp, which strengthen the note B. As

the tones E and B continue to be stressed, the first horn

(m. 200-210) and the trumpet (m. 213) entries recall the head

of the triadic motive.

Over a B pedal in the horns, tympani and double

bass (m. 220), the second ostinato figuration (see clarinet

part of Example 151) is elaborated by the woodwinds, piano

and strings. At the same time the violas and cellos give

the pattern in mirror-form. The horns, along with a rhythmic

eighth-note accompaniment in the first trumpet, provide

imitative entrances of the triadic motive beginning in

27. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
296

measure 230, after which the minor-major seventh chord on C

assumes the predominant role. Following the return to the

tonal center on E (m. 254-260), the muted trumpets present

imitative entrances of the triadic motive leading to a

sustained pedal (trumpets and horn) on the minor-major

seventh chord DFAC#, The pizzicato strings then continue

with a series of ascending and descending patterns based on

this chord.

As the horn and trumpets change to a sustained E

minor pedal (m. 278), the triadic motive, now in the tonic

key, is heard in the tympani, piano, and double basses

(m. 278-2 8 7 ). An abbreviated statement of the main theme

(m. 2 88) is followed by the triadic motive (m. 290) treated

in imitation by the muted trumpets over a sustained E-B

pedal in the piano, tympani, and strings. The triadic motive

appears in the muted trumpets (m. 290-297) with a change of

mode to E major. A fragment from the head of the main theme

beginning with the second violin in measure 296, brings the

movement to a close on the note E.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
297

Second Essay for Orchestra, Opus 17

The Second Essay was completed In March 1942.

Written for the Centennial of the New York Philharmonic-

Symphonv Orchestra,29 it was played by this orchestra under

the direction of Bruno Walter on April 16, 1942.3 Jerome

Bohm made the following comments about this work after its

premiere performance:

Although the thirty-two year old American composer


has given no program for his latest product, I re
ceived a definite impression that it had its roots
in his reactions to the war. The thematic substance
is strong and somewhat austere and is developed re
sourcefully and economically. It builds up to a
cannily constructed climax and the orchestration is
masterly.31

The Essay, Opus 17, though longer and more complex

than the first, retains the qualities of succinctness and

unity of mood. The principal thematic material consists of a

main theme revolving about the tonic of P minor, a second,

subordinate theme, and a cadential motive. A writer (the

28. Broder, 101.

29. Madeleine Goss, Contemporary American Composers (New York:


E. P. Dutton Co., Inc., 1952), 399-400.

30. Jerome D. Bohm, "Bruno Walter Conducts New York


Philharmonic," New York Herald Tribune (April 17, 1942).

31. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
298

article is unsigned) in the Australian Musical News and

Musical Digest states that Samuel Barber "developed Two-Part

Orchestral Form" in this work.^2 Robert Horan, writing in

M o d e m Music, states that this essay is cast in a "subtle

two-part form. Rather than use vague descriptive

adjectives, which may or may not obscure the issue, the plan

will be identified as a two-part form with coda. The

"subtlety" of this formal design will be discussed as the

material is unfolded. The diagram that follows will show

how the thematic material is presented; the intermittent

line, which appears in Part II of the diagram, is used to

show that a return to the main theme in the tonic key is made

during the closing part of the fugal section.

Part I Part II Coda


m. 1-74 75-169 170-180 181-213
Ternary design Double An abbre A concluding
(aba2 ). a1 main fugue: Main viated re section based on
theme, F minor b- theme and turn of the cadential
sub. theme, A-E#; subordinate main theme motive and the
cadential motive theme; be in F minor main theme.
used to conclude gins in Ffr. in the Essay ends on an
sub. theme area. closing F major triad.
a2 main theme, part of the
fragments of sub. fugue.
theme, F minor.

32. "American Profile," Australian Musical News and Musical


Digest XXXIII (July 1947), 12.

33. Robert Horan, "American Composers," Modern Music XX


(March-April 1943), 1 6 5 .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
299

The first section (a1) of the small ternary form

that makes up Part I begins with the flute announcing the

main theme over a sustained G flat pedal in the tuba and

a prolonged roll on the bass drum. As the key is F minor,

the G flat pedal (note the "ppp" dynamic- indication for the

tuba) again shows Barber's predilection for the lowered

second scale degree. The angular theme, which has a range

of a minor tenth (C-E ), revolves about the tonic note:

34
Ex. 152

_ Av,ciavie u poco vrtojio J


El FI

The chords throughout Part I are mostly triads,

the major seventh chord and the diminished-minor seventh

chord being also used. Aftervthe first statement of the

main theme in the tonic key,'fragments of the theme are

presented by the English horn (m. 8-12) and oboe (m. 13-15)

in the submediant area. Following the return of the tonic

triad on F at measure 15 (note the brief change of mode at

this point), the Neapolitan area is stressed from measure

34. Copyright 1942, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
300

18 to 23. The first section of Part I (m. 1-25) ends on an

implied A major triad. Along with the main thematic material,

several fragmentary forecasts of the coming fugue subject

have appeared in subordinate parts in this section: the

violas and cellos hint at the fugue subject in their

accompaniment to the main theme beginning in measure 8 ; a

fragment of the subject appears in the tympani beginning in

measure 1 5 ; at measure 18 the violins and cellos, providing

a rhythmic accompaniment to the main theme in the English

horn, bassoon, and violas, forecast the subject, and the

first trumpet and tympani again suggest the subject in the

last two measures of this section.

The secrad or b section of Part 1 begins when the

second theme, again angular in character, is introduced by

the violas in measure 26 (see Example 153). It will be

noticed that this theme also has a range of a minor ninth.

The repeated triplet figuration that appears in the woodwinds

while thi3 theme is being introduced is again suggestive of

the triplet rhythm of the fugue subject. The agitated feeling

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
301

Ex. 15335

Via. SniTVitm e

that prevails throughout most of this section is brought

about not only by the character of the second theme itself,

but also by the rapid triplet and sixteenth-note figurations

that are used to accompany it. The tonality quickly shifts

from A in measure 26 to E sharp minor; the tonal center from

measure 36 to 4l is on E flat, both minor and major; the

accompanying sixteenth note patterns in the winds and strings,

which emphasize perfect fourths and fifths, tend to obscure

the tonality from measure 46 to 52; from measure 52 to 6l the

tonal center hovers around P. The cadential motive is

introduced by the brass in measure 62 , and section two of

Part I comes to a close on an A major triad with added

second and sixth (m. 6 3 ):

35. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
302

Ex. 15436

The a2 section of Part I (m. 64-78) begins with the

lower strings and tympani, which are later reinforced by the

bassoons, playing a rhythmic ostinato-like figure consisting

of a diminution of the main theme. The main theme itself is

majestically introduced by the horns as the figuration

continues. Prom measure 69 to 75 the woodwinds provide

fragmentary entries based on the second theme. The main

part of a2 , which is centered in B flat, comes to a close

in measure 78 on an F sharp minor triad in the full

orchestra.

A decided increase in tempo as well as a marked

change in procedure herald the beginning of Part II. The

fugue subject is introduced by the clarinet beginning in P

36. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
303

sharp minor:

37
E x. 155

M0IT0 tlltfr
-u, \ *

The exposition of this double fugue extends from measure 79

to 114. There are nine entries of the main subject, the sub

ordinate theme, which serves as the second subject, being

introduced along with the main theme in the sixth entry

(m. 101). To expedite the discussion, a summary of the

exposition sections is given in the following diagram:

1st Entry 2nd Entry Codetta 1 3rd Entry 4th Entry


m. 79 -82 m. 82-84 m. 8 5-87 m. 88-91 m. 91-94
Main sub Real Imitative Subject in Oboe
ject intro answer in treatment English answers
duced by bassoon on of ascend horn on English
clarinet in A; clarinet ing four- E flat; horn a 6th
F sharp imitates note bassoon higher on
minor (see bassoon a figure and C; accom
Example dim. 5th (somewhat clarinet paniment
155). higher suggestive imitate figuration
(m. 8 3 ) of English based on
with sub cadential horn with Codetta 1.
ject motive subject
material. treated in material.
mirror form).

37. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
304

Codetta 2 5th Entry 6th Entry


in. 9 5 - 9 6 m. 97-99 m. 101-104
Imitative phrase ex Main sub
entries of tended to ject in
figure used m. 100. 1st violins
in Codetta Subject on on F sharp;
1. F in 2nd second sub
trumpet; ject in
1st trumpet piccolo and
imitates flute;
the 2nd at tonality of
the minor F sharp
3rd above; momentarily
short restored.
phrase ex
tension
leads to
6th entry.

7th Entry 8th Entry 9th Entry


m. 104-107 m. 108-111 m. 111-114
Main sub Main sub Main sub
ject in 2nd ject in ject in
violin violas on cellos and
on A; E flat; double bass
second sub second sub on C;
ject in ject in second sub
clarinet flutes and ject in
C minor? clarinets flutes,
on B flat; oboes,
C minor later
joined by
bassoon;
C minor.

The codetta material and the first subject are

developed from measure 111 to 133. As the strings and the

third and fourth horns sustain a C major triad, the clarinet

(m. 133) presents the subject in mirror form against an

augmentation of the subject in the first and second horns

(see Example 156). The flute follows in measure 138 with the

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
305

38
Ex. 156

Hiffcr
. s n ) m
^ -$

subject again in mirror against the augmentation of it in the

third horn; the sustained organ point in the strings is

shifted to a C sharp minor triad during this entry.

Beginning in measure 144 the second subject is

treated in augmentation by the strings as the winds and

tympani engage in a sort of antiphonal treatment of the fugue

subject. The tonal center from measure 144 to 151 hovers

around P sharp.

The fugue subject (m. 1 58) is presented by the

cellos and double basses against the main theme in the first

and second trombones as the key moves to E minor. While the

violins begin the fugue subject (m. l6l) and the horns take

over the main theme against it, an enharmonic submediant

prolongation in P minor is set up (C sharp = D flat).

The subtlety of the form that was alluded to

38. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
306

earlier in this discussion is manifested in the abbreviated

return of the main theme in the tonic key at measure 171 in

the concluding measures of Part II. As the triplet

figurations, the "embers of the fugal fire," die away in the

tympani and side-drum, Part II comes to a close. The key

throughout this closing passage (m. 171-181) is F minor.

A long, intense passage based primarily on the

augmentation of the cadential motive serves as a coda. As

the tension reaches its height the trumpets (m. 1 9 8 )


>
vociferously bring forth the main theme for the last time.

A subdominant prolongation is present in the concluding

measures (m. 207-212). This Essay, which began rather

quietly in F minor, ends with a solemn plagal cadence to

an F major triad.

Commando March

This March, which has no opus number, was written

in 19^3* the year that Barber was inducted into the A r m y . 39

After the first performance by an Air Force Band in that

year, it was recorded in 1953 "by the Eastman Wind Ensemble,

conducted by Frederick Fennell.^0

39 Broder, 3 6 .

40. Mercury MG4006, "American Concert Band Masterpieces."

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
307

It is written in three-part form with an intro

duction and coda. While the over-all key is E flat major,

the composer frequently substitutes the submediant harmony

for the tonic a procedure that has been observed several

times in other works. The chords are predominantly triads

with added seconds and sixths. Except in the B section,

where the augmented fourth root relation is stressed, root

movement by third and fifth prevails.

The triplet figures and other simple unit divisions

that are presented in the introduction (m. 1-11) form the

basis of much of the work:

Ex. 1572*1

The A1 section that follows is a small ternary form, the

first part (a1, m. 12-19) consisting of a regular eight-

measure sentence that is presented over rhythmic eighth-note

41. Copyright 1943* 1944, by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
308

chords in the oboes, horns, and basses:

Ex. 1582*2

o*.,Mn.

5 wt *

AtT, Batj C-b

I
el
!y l

In the b section (m. 19-33) the submediant and Neapolitan

areas of E flat major are stressed. While the euphonium solo

is an outgrowth of the a1 melody, it nevertheless provides a

little contrast.

42. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
309

Ex. 159^3

0 Pl,9b,cV

r $ i t i h

E<*pK.Sol
Xc

s
jrry h k =

f
m

The a2 section begins at letter D, measure 34, as the wood

winds restate the a1 melody. A transitional phrase (m. 43-

5 2), which is made up of the introductory triplet figures and

a fragment of the A melody, is played by the .brass leading to

the B section that begins with the anacrusis to measure 53.

The B section (m. 53-74) consists of a series of

sequential patterns, the triplet figures of which show a

marked relationship to those used in the introduction. A

comparison of Example 160 with Example 157, measures 3 2nd

4, will show the similarity. Note also the augmented fourth

root relation that is employed in section B.

43. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
310

Ex. l60^4

Beginning in E minor, it moves to D flat major (m. 63-74)

and finally to B minor (m. 63-74). A repetition of the

dominant tone of E flat major in the comets in measure 74

leads to the restoration of that key as the section

begins (m. 7 5 ).

The A^ section is abbreviated and ornamented by

scale passages and triplet figures in the woodwinds, and the

transitional phrase leading tc the small b section of the

ternary design is omitted. The short coda (m. 106-113)

consists of the introductory triplet figures over a tonic

pedal. After an ascending E flat major scale that begins

in the trombones and saxophones at measure 110, the March

comes to a close on the note E flat.

44. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
311

Ballet Suite Medea, Opus 23

Written in 1 94 6,^ 5 the Suite is based on the Greek

tragedy "Medea11 by Euripedes and falls into the category of

program music. The score was commissioned by the Alice M.

Ditson Fund of Columbia University for Martha Graham and was

first danced by her and her company at the MacMillan Theater

of Columbia University in May of 1946.^ Miss Graham

entitled her ballet "Serpent Heart" at first and later "Cave

of the Heart," but the composer has preferred to use the

original title of the drama for the suite for full orchestra. ^

On the jacket of the record and in the published

score Samuel Barber has contributed the following account of

the Ballet and of the Suite drawn from i t :

Neither Miss Graham nor the composer wished to use


the Medea-Jason legend literally in the ballet.
These mythical figures served rather to project
psychological states of jealousy and vengeance
which are timeless.

The choreography and music were conceived, as it


were, on two time levels, the ancient-mythical and
the contemporary. Medea and Jason first appear as

45. Broder, 102.

46. Ibid., 38.

47. Information contained on the jacket of the record:


London LPS 333*

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
312

godlike, superhuman figures of the Greek tragedy.


As the tension and conflict between them increase,
they step out of their legendary roles from time
to time and become the modern man and woman,
caught in the nets of jealousy and destructive
love; and at the end reassume their mythical
quality. In both the dancing and music, archaic
and contemporary idioms are used. Medea, in her
final scene after the denouement, becomes once
more the descendant of the sun.

Beside Medea and Jason there are two other


characters in the ballet, the Young Princess
whom Jason marries out of ambition and for whom
he betrays Medea, and an attendant who assumes
the part of the onlooking chorus of the Greek
tragedy, sympathizing, consoling and interpreting
the actions of the major characters.

The suite follows roughly the form of a Greek


tragedy. In the Parodos the characters first
appear. The Choros, lyric and reflective, com
ments on the action which is to unfold. The
Young Princess appears in a dance of freshness
and innocence, followed by a heroic dance of
Jason. Another plaintive Choros leads to Medea's
dance of obsessive and diabolical vengeance. The
Kantikos Agonias, an interlude of menace and
foreboding, follows. Medea's terrible crime,
the murder of the Princess and her own children,
has been committed, announced at the beginning
of the Exodos by a violent fanfare of trumpets.
In this final section the various themes of the
chief characters of the work are blended together;
little by little the music subsides and Medea and
Jason recede into the legendary past.48

The avoidance of a literal interpretation of the

Medea-Jason legend is reflected in the treatment of the

musical materials. The principal melodic material that is

48. Mote for "Medea, 11 in the published score, Copyright 1949*


by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
313

presented in the "Parados" consists of two main motives

(Motives A and B) and a theme. Of the two motives that are

presented, neither can be consistently associated with one of

the two principal characters, but each may appear with either,

and often one is interpolated between parts of the other.

Over a forzando chord in the strings, brass, percussion, and

bassoons, Motive A is introduced by the upper woodwinds,

xylophone, and piano. The sustained chord consists of a

perfect fifth and major seventh above the bass tone C; the

interval of a second and its expansion (a ninth) marks

Motive A:

Of the two "time levels" mentioned by the composer

in the note in the score, the "ancient-mythical" is suggested

by the theme that begins at measure 7 (see Example 162). As

49. Copyright 1949* by G. Schirmer, Inc., New York.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
314

the first clarinet, harp and piano supply repeated figures

stressing the interval of a second, the first violins intro

duce the antecedent phrase of the theme as the tonality shifts

to A flat. The consequent phrase is played by the first

bassoon under a repeated pattern in the oboe; an augmented

sixth interval (A^-P^) is quietly sustained by the strings as

the consequent phrase begins (m. 14-16), giving way to the

interval of a second at measure 16 (violins only). Both

phrases of this theme are built on a three-note figure that

stresses the interval of a second; this figure is bracketed

in the following example:

Ex. 16250 Antecedent Phrase

Consequent Phrase

50. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
315

Motive A (see Example 161) returns at measure 21 as

the tonality reverts momentarily to C. A rapid scale pattern

and repeated figure stressing the interval of a second

(m. 22-25) lead to Motive B beginning on the last half of the

third beat in measure 25 (see Example 1 6 3 ). Prom this point

to the end of the movement, Motive A is interpolated between

parts of Motive B. Like the theme (see Example 162), the

material used to accompany Motive B includes a three-note

figure employing seconds.

51
Ex. 163 Motive B
Fl.JHn.
y/t|. only
* ----------- C 1 3 - ,
T f i - s ------------ 'r
f H atj: iz l.j ------------- TL f -
-----
t 77 -
w

ttc .
Vc.,DJB. vt .Vc. (;* othue.t)
--- 1 tru p -- - ------- Ifpfr y, ft far r p -i

Although the chord structures are made complex by

the addition of the Interval of a second (in its inverted and

expanded forms also), the important harmonic movement can be

determined. At measure 26 the tonality centers about G flat;

it shifts then to A (m. 3*0 * touching upon P at measure 40,

51. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
316

reverting to A at measure 50; finally, it returns to the

original tonality of C (m. 54).

The three-note figure employing the interval of a-

second is again prominent throughout the "Choros," which is

divided into two parts and followed by a postlude. The first

part (m. 1-85) follows a tripartite design ( a H a 2 ). In the

a^ section (m. 1-28) the flute, oboe, and clarinet present

Choros-Theme A in the tonality of A flat. The theme is

made up of descending and ascending three-note figures:

Ex. 16452

A llc ^ w t t o I[ W )

I - s te v
-
! ---------- _J ^
i V*tp
<

1 i ^ |
h e z ib e 1f f K w f - - - - S - 7 - =
fr- fjr
Ti fe:
T I
14 f a - + - k b
wip
i -c :m
i

- d l - J f a

Wtp

52. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
317

At measure 17 the bassoon continues the dotted quarter and

sixteenth-note rhythm while the trumpet (later the flute and

clarinet) presents a variant of the theme:

Tft
X

Frequent simultaneous cross-relationships in the chord

structures, which largely result from the use of the

intervals of a second and ninth, appear during the homo-

phonic presentation of Choros-Theme B that follows in the

b section (m. 29-67):

53. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
313

Ex. 16654

(yi *ren4et<*l)
t r ~ 3 1 1R F b * . 1 1
- F to
*1f f *

While a tonal shift from A flat to D occurs as the above

theme begins, the tonality within this section is often

unclear. Following an abbreviated statement of the theme

in the trumpets and trombones (m. 64-67), the tonality

reverts to A flat. The a section (m. 68-8 5 ) begins as the

variant of Choros-Theme A (see Example 165) is restated by

the bassoon and later the first violins. The first part is

brought to a close in measure 85 by the cellos and double

basses playing the three-note figure (see Example 164) that

began the movement.

The second section "Medea and Jason" (m. 85-127)

is divided into two parts. Except for tonality and minor

changes in instrumentation, the first part (m. 85-Hl), which

concerns itself with Motives A and B, is similar to measures

26 to 47 of the first movement. A sustained G flat pedal

54. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
319-

(m. 85-8 9 ), which suggests the Neapolitan area of F, is

followed by an implied dominant to tonic cadence in F (m. 90-

91), the over-all tonality of this part. A tonal shift to D

and contrapuntal treatment of a new figure made up of seconds

(see Example 1 67 ) mark the beginning of the second part

(m. 111-126). Over a tremolo-figuration in the harp and

piano stressing minor and major seconds, the rising sequential

pattern played by the oboe and reinforced by the second

violins gives the effect of stretto-like, mirror Imitations

of the five-note repeated figure in the clarinet, supported

by the violas.

Ex. 16755

vnotto tntVme.ma j
IP -
ri-- - [fcp? f*rfncfr" T W 1
= 4==Ur ---- f ||J
<

H r 2
=~"- : ---
W ir

The tension quickly mounts as the instrumentation is

increased, and, at measure 120, a double forte is reached on

55. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
320

an F sharp diminished-minor ninth chord played by the full

orchestra. Rapid descending patterns., which derive from the

five-note figure that began this part (see Example 167),

appear in the brass, strings, woodwinds, and piano (m. 120-

126) while the chord on F sharp is sustained (note that the

second trumpet sustains an F natural from measure 122 to 126).

This rapid passage leads to the largamente or pcstlude section

beginning at measure 127 while the tonality shifts to C during

the repetition of the tonic and subdominant chords of C. The

movement is brought to a close by a three-note figure made up

of descending minor seconds played by the strings along with

imitative entries in the horn, trombone, and, later, the


/ b .
bassoon. The final chord (F, E , and G), which concludes a

kind of plagal cadence, again draws attention to the interval

of a second in its inverted and expanded forms.

An attacca is indicated for the third movement

where C is retained as the over-all tonality. The two

dances that make up this section The Young Princess; Jason;

fall into a closed two-part form preceded by an introduction

and followed by a coda. The woodwinds freely exchange an

ascending sixteenth-note pattern in the short introduction

(m. 1-6), in which the tonic chord of C is represented by an

Incomplete ninth chord (CGD). The interval of a second again

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
321

predominates in the principal melody of Part I, which is

played by the oboe beginning in measure 6:

56
Ex. 168
1

3-Wife

The subdominant, dominant of the dominant, dominant, and

tonic chords of C (m. 9-20) make up the sketchy chordal

background as the woodwinds again take up the introductory

material. A second statement of the above melody in the

Neapolitan area of C (oboe, m. 20-23) is followed by the


57
introductory pattern in the woodwinds. Part I is brought

to a close by the tympani, piano, cellos, and double basses

on the tone C (m. 26).

Jason's heroic dance begins at measure 27, the

first principal theme of Part II (m. 27-46) being introduced

by trumpets in the new tonality of E; in essence it is an

elaborate treatment of Motive A:

5 6 . Ibid.

57. The ritornello concept is suggested by the return of the


introductory pattern; it separates the two statements of
the theme and concludes Part I.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
322

Ex . 16958
J:fcO
C-TpT.

P e ^ f g
O

} y f IS
: ^
H '

Following another complete statement of this theme inthe

woodwinds supported by the piano an<f strings (m. 31-3 3 )> the

second principal melody of this part is introduced by the

horns over an E pedal and a fragment from the head of the

first theme in the violas and cellos:

Ex. 17059

A tonal shift to F is made in the second section of Part 2

(m. 41-46), in which transformations of both themes are

5 8 . Copyright 1949# G. Schirmer.

59. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
323

presented simultaneously; (a complete statement of the second

theme appears in measures 41 to 43). The tonality reverts to

C at measure 47 as the coda begins.

Frequent meter changes and short cadencing patterns

utilizing both themes characterize the short coda (m. 47-63).

The tonality of C is strongly felt up to the penultimate

measure, the final chord, however, being a major third on B

flat.

Like the preceding movement, the fourth, "Choros,"

is a closed two-part form. A rltornello is again suggested

by the frequent appearances of a short introductory figure,

which separates several statements of the principal theme

in Part 1 and rounds out Part 2:

60
Ex. 171

The principal theme of Part 1, which follows in measure 5*

contains an ascending three-note figure in which the

second is the characteristic interval, followed by a

descending chordal outline (see Example 172). Of particular

60. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
324

harmonic interest in Part 1 is the emphasis that is placed on

chords built in seconds (BCD, DEF, etc.). The key of A minor

prevails throughout Part 1 and is only momentarily relinquished

during Part 2.

Ex. 17261

The eight-measure theme comes to a close on the tonic triad

of A minor (m, 11), after which the introductory figure is

restated by the violins and subjected to sequential treat

ment by the oboe (m. 17-22). This figure also follows the

second statement of the theme in the clarinet (m. 23-28) and

the third in the flute (m. 33-40), bringing Part 1 to a close

in measure 47 on an open fifth on A.

Part 2 consists of a literal repetition of Choros-

Theme B (see Example 166) from the second movement; measures

48 to 73 are identical to measures 29 to 54 of the second

movement. The introductory figure is played in the closing


v
measures by the flute, bringing the movement to a close on an

open fifth on A.

61. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
325

With Medea's frenzied dance of vengeance in the

fifth movement, the high point of tension is reached. An

extended prelude leads to the dance, after which a coda,

which maintains the high tension level, brings the movement

to a close.

With the beginning of the prelude in B flat minor,

Motive L is softly played by the harp and piano, providing

a background for the quasi recitative solo in the English

horn that forecasts fragments of tne dance theme:

62
Ex. 173

n f
w w*w

62. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
326

The somber mood of the initial measures is interrupted at

measure 12, where the full orchestra deals with fragments of

the dance theme and Motive B in the tonality of G flat. More

elaborate treatment of the English horn melody is heard in

the flute and clarinet (m. 27-31)* leading at measure 34 to

rapid descending sixteenth-note patterns based on the interval

of a second. The dynamic level reaches forte at measure 42.

Here the three-note ascending figure that was used to

accompany Motive B in its initial presentation (see Example

163) is forcefully stated by the brass against Motive A in

the piano and xylophone. Although the dynamic level reverts

to piano and the texture thins out between measures 46 and 50,

the repeated figure in the strings and the rhythmic sixteenth-

note pattern in the side drum (see Example 174) are enough

to maintain the nervous tension that has been created.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
327

63
E x. 174

Ski

L >|_,iBMTOm
5U,jrum W W t M WMM
rtttnJ JWITO _____________ ________

tf= 3
-Pf
ffii{X
ltf
g tn y
X
1
The close Integration of the thematic and

accompaniment material, most of which is built on a rising

or falling three-note figure of which the second is the

characteristic Interval, is perhaps more clearly shown in

Medea's dance, which now begins, than in any other part of

the suite. Divided into three sections, the subdivisions

within the first two being set off by the repeated figure

quoted above, it commences in B flat minor with an ostinato

figuration that provides an accompaniment for the "con-


,,64
temporary theme presented by the oboe in measure 5 1 .

6 3 . Ibid.

64. Refers to "time level" as mentioned by the composer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
328

65
E x. 175

S3 >
. z r*
1I
n -------------------------------------- 1
P W '"J\j. ii \

---5 /--d
-M -----
...

N S W

Section I (m. 50-105) is divided into three sub

sections. In the first (m. 50-66), the oboe, bassoon, and

clarinet share two statements of the theme over the ostinato

pattern in the piano. Following a statement of the repeated

pattern in the strings and side drums that begins sub-section

2 (m. 67-8 3 ), the theme appears in the woodwinds and trumpets

over the ostinato pattern, which is later reinforced by the

bassoons and low strings. This part comes to a close with

a reference to the tail of the second theme from Jason's

6 5 . Copyright 19^9* C. Schirmer.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
329

heroic dance (m. 82-84) of the third movement (see Example

170). In the concluding part of Section I (m. 85-105), the

theme and its transformations are forcefully stated by the

brass as the woodwinds, strings, and xylophone join with the

piano in reinforcing the ostinato figuration.

A tonal shift to F is made as the trumpets and

trombones add rhythmic vitality to the repeated figure in the

strings and side drum that begins Section II (m. 106-150).

Structurally, this section is the same as the preceding one,

the shift to the dominant tonality of P and the change in

texture and treatment of the material being the determining

factors in the formal division.

Sub-sections 1 and 2 of Section II (m. 106-122,

123-136) are essentially the same. The ostinato figuration

is played by the piano and bassoons over which the woodwinds,

trumpets and strings develop the tail of the theme, neither

the head nor complete statement of the theme appearing in this

section. In sub-section 3 (m. 137-150) the ostinato pattern

is somewhat modified and the principal theme of the dance does

not appear. Although no literal references are made, the

three-note figure that begins each melodic entry from measure

139 to 146 bears a marked resemblance to that which makes up

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
330

the head of the theme in the first movement (see Example 162).

Section III (m. 15O-I6 5 ) begins with the return to

the original key of B flat minor. A rising three-note pattern

replaces the repeated figure in the violin and side drum, arid

the ostinato pattern is dropped. The repeated violin figure

(see Example 17*0 is, however, referred to in the woodwinds

(m. 154-155) as the sixteenth-eighth-sixteenth-note rhythmic

division contained in the theme is stressed by the brass and

strings. A somewhat modified statement of the theme follows

in measures 157 to 160, giving way to the repeated three-note

figure (m. 162-165) that made up the ostinato pattern that

began the dance.

The nervous tension, which has been continually

building up throughout the dance, reaches its highest point

with the return of Motive B at the beginning of the coda in

measure 166. While the rhythmic drive is abated with the

return of the longer note values, the fortissimo brass and

strings maintain a high degree of tension right up to the

final unison B flat that ends the movement.

The ethereal, spirit-like musical setting of the

sixth movement, "Kantikos Agonias," is in keeping with this

interlude of menace and foreboding. Consisting of only

twenty-seven measures, it begins with a short motive

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
331

employing the interval of a ninth:

66
Ex. 176

This motive, which is later extended, introduces the three

statements of Choros-Theme 3 from the second movement (see

Example 166) and also brings the interlude to a close. The

tone G sharp, which pyramids through the orchestra, and an

incomplete chord structure including the interval of a

seventh (G^D^P^) that concludes the introduction (m.~12),

define the over-all tonal center.

The first statement of Choros-Theme B appears in

the oboe in measure 13 along with the introductory motive

in the strings. A filled-in interval of a seventh (G

down to A flat) accompanies the second;and third appearances

of the theme. (Note the canonic imitation between the oboe

and bassoon in the third statement, measures 19 to 22.) At the

66. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
332

close of the third entry of the theme the strings take up the

introductory material, bringing the movement to a close on

the incomplete chord outline on G sharp. The voicing of the

final chord draws attention to the interval of a second and

seventh.

Medea's violent crime the murder of the young

princess, the princess's father, and her own two children

is announced at the beginning of the final movement, "Exodos,"

by the polyharmonic fanfare in the trumpets:

67
Ex. 177
AUtJTpjiJ*J&fe)
.Trpt.l ^ ^

The first twenty introductory measures consist of rapid

sixteenth-note patterns in the woodwinds and strings and

eighth-note figurations in the brass, which continue to

exploit the interval of a second. The main body of the

movement thereupon begins with the return of the first theme

from Jason's heroic dance (third movement, see Example 169).

6 7 . Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
333

Except for a momentary center on C sharp (m. 6-14), the

tonality remains in a state of flux until measure 43, where

the tonality of C is restored and thereafter maintained. The

following diagram will summarize the movement:

m. 1-20 m. 21-32 m. 33-38


Introduction: First theme from Transitional phrase
Motive B Jason's heroic dance consisting of re
providing a in strings, brass peated figure made
background for and woodwinds. up of seconds and
fragments of ninths.
Medea:s dance
theme.

m. 38-45 m. 46-56 m. 57-67


Motive B re A literal restate Motive A returning
turning in the ment of the postlude in the xylophone
woodwinds and from the second and piano and re
strings over movement (m. 127-136) peated during the
a reference restatement of
to Jason's the principal theme
theme in the from the first move
brass. ment . Movement
closes with an in
complete seventh
chord on G
(CEbB ) .

The seven short sections or movements of the suite

form an independent and self-sufficient musical structure,

unified by the transfer of material from movement to movement

and the close integration of the principal thematic material

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
itself. Not only do the two principal .motives reappear in

several movements, but parts of the fourth and sixth movements

are derived from thematic material from the second; Jason's

theme from the third movement, the postlude from the second,

Motives A and B, and the principal theme from the first move

ment return in the Exodos. Throughout this discussion it has

been shown that most of the principal thematic material con

tains a rising or falling three-note figure of which the

interval of the second is characteristic. This common bond

within the thematic structures is perhaps even more important

as a unifying factor than the transfer of material.

In the discussions of the Second Symphony,

the Capricorn Concerto, and the nostalgic Knoxville: Summer

of 1915* the importance of the interval of a second has been

brought out. In Medea the interval of a second (or its ex

pansion, a ninth, or inversion, a seventh) is the generating

source for the entire work; it determines the main melodic

material and important structural points, frequently re

placing tonality as a means of unification.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
335

Summary

Music critics and historians have found it con

venient to place many contemporary American composers in

groups and to label each group. Alloted to the class of

"neo-romantics," and often cited as one of its most out

standing representatives, is Samuel Barber. Although

meaningful up to a certain point, pigeonholing of this

sort often results in oversimplification when a composer's

total output is carefully examined. Labeling Barber's music

neo-romantic, while helpful in describing his earlier works,

disregards significant elements in his later and more im

portant products.

It has been found that traditional procedures

are characteristic of nearly all of Barber's music up to

about 1939. After this time these procedures begin to

be mingled with, or replaced by, a technical enrichment.

Although foreshadowed here and there in earlier works,

the first extensive evidence of the change of style

and the musical growth that results from this fusion

of the old and new elements, is found in the Concerto

for Violin and Orchestra, Opus 14, written in 1939.

This musical growth reveals itself in the technical aspects

of melody, harmonic and contrapuntal texture and rhythm, as

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
336

well as in alterations of structural designs.

The melodic structure in the earlier music is

largely governed by its tonality, modal substitutes being

frequently used for various diatonic scale degrees. Many

of the simple folk-like melodies as well as the more

dramatic and expansive lines are made up of chordal patterns

(particularly seventh-chord outlines). In the later music,

the lyric type of line tends to become more angular and

more chromatic; this chromaticism sometimes results from

more extended modal substitution the refrain from A

Stopwatch and an Ordnance Map (1940) being one example of

this practice (see Example 44, page 112). In the Capricorn

Concerto, Violoncello Concerto, Second Symphony, and

particularly in Medea, the dramatic type of line, while re

taining the broad leaps, is contracted into a short theme

or motive, poignant and piercing. Tonality is no longer the

principal governing factor; instead, certain intervals

dominate the melodic structure the significant role that

is played by the interval of a second having already been

stressed many times in this study. Samuel Barber continues

to show his predilection for melodic structures made up of

chordal outlines, thus providing one important common bond

between his earlier and later music.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
337

The chord structures in the majority of the

earlier works are built in thirds and are generally limited

to common triads and seventh-chords with added tones. In

addition to the secondary dominants, the Neapolitan sixth

chord and especially the augmented sixth chord types are

frequent. Even in the earliest works, each of which is based

on a single tonal center, Barber employs the concept of

interchangeability of mode. The harmonic texture is generally

consonant, dissonant tones being resolved according to

traditional procedures. After about 1939 the chord

structures, which are often the result of the confluence of

contrapuntal lines, become more complex and the harmonic

texture grows more dissonant. Although chords are still

predominantly built in thirds, it is through the inter

action of quartal and tertian harmony and the employment of

split intervals, i.e., simultaneous use of both major and

minor thirds or perfect and imperfect fifths, that more

complex sonorities result.

While most of the later works are still anchored

to a tonal center, devices new to Barber's music are intro

duced. The chordal work Anthony 0 Daly is constructed above

or below the tone E, which is sounded in all but four of its

86 measures. Polyharmony appears in the fugal section of

the Second Essay and it is employed to recall a violent

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
338

murder in Medea. In the Piano Sonata tonality is sometimes

abandoned while Barber explores the possibilities of the

twelve-tone style of writing.

While the harmonic texture of many of the earlier

works may be said to stem from Bach by way of Brahms, it is

wholly contemporary in spirit in such later music as the

Capricorn Concerto, Second Symphony, Song Cycles, Piano

Sonata, and Medea.

Barber's rhythms are varied and free from

mannerisms. In the song literature the vocal lines are

carefully suited to the rhythm of the words, frequent meter

changes being employed where necessary. In the instrumental

music the rhythms range from the even stride of quarter notes

in the Adagio for Strings to the more irregular a.nd unusual

organizations used in the third movement of Excursions.

In the discussion of form in the Harvard

Dictionary of Music, it is stated:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
339

There exists a widespread tendency among m o d e m


composers and writers to deny, or at least to
minimize, the importance of musical forms, the
view being that each composition creates not
only its own inner form (form within the com
position; ) but also its outer structure (foym
of the composition).

While the above statement may be justified and applicable to

many works of the nineteenth and twentieth century, it is

inappropriate as far as the music of Samuel Barber is con

cerned. Barber's feeling for form is strong, and it is

in this respect that his entire musical output shows the

closest ties with the past. In the solo song literature

the formal designs include, among others, the simple varia

tion type, bar-form, binary and ternary structures, and the'

more extended rondo. It would appear that the composer's

choice of a text for his solo songs and choral pieces is

often determined by the formal possibilities it offers. The

larger compositions are firmly rooted in the principles of

sonata construction. Although Barber does show an almost

slavish reliance upon well tested models in several of his

earliest works (e.g., Overture to the School for Scandal,

1931, Sonata for Violoncello and Plano, 1932), in later ones

he imposes many changes on the traditional designs, changes

1. Harvard Dictionary of Music (Cambridge: Harvard


University Press', 1^4), 279.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
340

that bring about logical and well-integrated treatment of

the material. In the song literature and instrumental works,

Barber frequently builds an entire piece out of the material

presented in the introduction. This procedure has been

noted especially in the discussions of the two Song Cycles,

the first movement of the String Serenade, first movement of

the Capricorn Concerto, and in the First Symphony. In the

two Essays the composer employs, in altered form, material

presented early in each composition.

Most of Barber's large works are scored for the

usual woodwind, brass, percussion, and string groups that

make up the twentieth-century orchestra. Even in his

earliest works, in which he tends to rely upon well-tested

instrumental combinations and doublings, his orchestration

is tasteful and-varied and his sense of instrumental colors

is in keeping with the fundamentally lyric character of his

music. In the later music Barber shows his ability to ex

ploit the idiomatic capacities of the Individual instruments;

his use of the English horn, bass clarinet, and especially

the piano is noteworthy.

Since his separation from the Army in 1945, Barber

has been living in comparative seclusion in his home in Mt.

Kisco, New York, preoccupied with composition. He is one of

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.

341

the relatively few serious American composers who prefers

and is able to earn a living by composition alone. His

devotion to his art, his adherence to the highest standards,

and his power of self-criticism, give every indication that

he will continue to make important contributions in the field

of serious music of the twentieth century.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
342

APPENDIX A

Chronological List of Published Works

Title Date

The Daisies" for voice and piano, Op. 2, No. 1 1927

"With Rue My Heart is Laden" for voice & piano,


Op. 2, No. 2. 1928

Serenade for String Quartet or String


Orchestra, Op7 V. 1929

Dover Beach for voice and string quartet, Op. 3 1931

Overture to The School for Scandal, Op. 5 . 1931

Sonata for Violoncello and Piano, Op. 6 . 1932

Music for a Scene from Sheiley, Op. 7. 1933

"Bessie Bobtail" for voice & piano, Op. 2. 1934

"The Virgin Martyrs" for 4-part chorus of


women's voices, Op. 8 , No. 1. 1935

"Let Down the Bars, 0 Death" for 4-part chorus


of mixed voices, Op. 8 , No. 2. 1936

Symphony N o . 1_, Op. 9. 1936 (rev. 1942)

Three Songs set to Poems from "Chamber Music"


by James Joyce, Op. 10. 1936

1. "Rain has Fallen."


2. "Sleep Now."
3. "I Hear an Army" (also for voice & orch.).

String Quartet, Op. 11 1936

Adagio for Strings (the slow movement of Op. 11


arr. for Str. Orch.). 1936

"Mary Hynes" for 4-part chorus of mixed voices,


Op. 16, No. 1. 1936

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
343

Essay for Orchestra, Op. 12. 1937

"A Nun Takes the Veil" for voice & piano,


Op. 13, No. 1. 1937

"The Secrets of the Old" for voice & piano,


Op. 13, No. 2. 1938

"Sure on This Shining Night" for voice & piano


(also for voice & orch.), Op. 13., No. 3 . 1938

Concerto for Violin and Orchestra, Op. 14. 1939

"Nocturne" for voice & piano (also for voice &


orch.), Op. 13, No. 4. 1940

A Stopwatch and an Ordnance Map for chorus of


men's voices & 3 kettledrums, Op. 1 5 . 1940

"Anthony 0 Daly" for 4-part chorus of mixed


voices, Op. 16, No. 2. 1940

"The Coolin'1 for 4-part chorus of mixed voices,


Op. 16, No. 3 . 1940

Second Essay for Orchestra, Op. 17. 1942

"The Queen's face on the Summery Coin" for


voice & piano, Op. 18, No. 1. 1942

"Monks and Raisins" for voice & piano, Op. 18,


No. 2. 1943

Commando March for band. . 1943

Symphony N o . 2, Op. 19. 1944 (rev. 1947)

Excursions. Pour piano pieces, Op. 20. 1944

Capricorn Concerto for flute, oboe, trumpet,


& strings, Op. 21. 1944

Concerto for Violoncello and Orchestra, Op. 22. 1945

Suite from the Ballet Medea, Op. 23. 1947

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
344

Ifooxville: Summer of 1915for soprano &


orch., Op. 24. 1947
Nuv.oletta for voice & piano. Op. 2 5 . 1947
Piano Sonata, Op. 26. 1949
Melodies passageres for voice & piano, Op. 27 1950-51

1. "Puisque tout passe."


2. "Un cygne."
3. "Tombeau dans un pare."
4. "Le clocher chante."
5. "Depart."

Souvenirs, Ballet Suite, 1 Op. 28, for (a) One piano,


four hands (b) Orchestra. 1952
Hermit Songs for voice & piano, to poems
translated from anonymous Irish texts of
the 8th to 13th centuries, Op. 2 9 . 1952-53
1.
"At St. Patrick's Purgatory."
2.
"Church Bell at Night."
3.
"St. Ita's Vision."
4.
"The Heavenly Banquet."
5.
"The Crucifixion."
6.
"Sea-Snatch."
7.
"Promiscuity."
.8 .
"The Monk and His Cat."
9.
"The Praises of God."
10.
"The Desire for Hermitage."
2
' Prayers of Kierkegaard for chorus of mixed voices,
soprano solo, and orchestra, Op. 30. 1954
3
Summer Music for woodwind quintet, Op. 31. 1957
4
Vanessa, an opera in preparation.

1. Not included in this study.

2. Ibid.

3. Ibid.

4. Ibid.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
345

APPENDIX B

List of Records

Dover Beach, Op. 3.

Samuel Barber, baritone; Curtis String Quartet.


2 sides, 12" 78 rpm, 1936. RCA 8998 (out of print).

Paul King, baritone; Hartt String Quartet. 1/2 side,


12" 33 1 /3 rpm. See Symphony No. 1, Op. 9, below.

Overture to The School for Scandal, Op. 5.

Janssen Symphony Orchestra of Los Angeles,


conducted by Werner Janssen. 2 sides, 12" 78 rpm,
1944. RCA Victor 11-8591.

Eastman-Rochester Symphony Orchestra, conducted by


Howard Hanson. 1 /3 side, 33 1/3 rpm, 1953.
Mercury 40002.

Note: The same side also includes the Adagio for


Strings, Op. 11, and Essay for Orchestra, O p . T 5 7
Morton Gould's Latin-Ame'rican Symphon'ette is on
the other side.

American Recording Society Orchestra, conducted by


Walter Hendl. 1/2 side, 10" 33 1/3 rpm (1953, for
subscribers only). American Recording Society ARS 26.

Note: The same side includes Music for a Scene from


Shelley, Op. 5 . Aaron Copland's AppalacELan Spring
is on the other side.

Sonata for Violoncello and Piano, Op. 6 .

Raya Garbousova, cello; Erich-Itor Kahn, piano. 8


sides, 4 1 2 " 78 rpm, with album (1947, for subscribers
only). Concert Hall B 1. Also 1 side, 12" 33 1/3
rpm (1951). Concert Hall S 1092.

George Ricci, 'cello; Leopold Mittman, piano. 1/2 '


side, 12" 33 1/3 rpm, 1951. Stradivari 602.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
t

346

Note: The other side includes the String Quartet,


Op. 1 1 . -------

Music for a Scene from Shelley, Op. 7.

American Recording Society Orchestra. See Overture


to the School for Scandal, Op. 5, above.

Let Down the Bars, 0 Death, Op. 8 , No. 2.

Vienna State Academy Chamber Chorus, conducted by


Ferdinand Grossman. 1/4 side, 12" 33 1/3 rpm, 1952.
Vox PL 7750.

Note: This disc is entitled A Concert of American


Music in Schonbrunn. Choral pieces of PTstoh,
CoplancTT Thompson and Thomson are also included.

Symphony No. 1, Op. 9.

New York Philharmonic-Symphony Orchestra, conducted by


Bruno Walter. 4 sides, 2 12" 7*8 rpm, with album, 1945.
Columbia MX-252.

Note: Issued in England, 1948, as Columbia LX-1077/8.

Stockholm Symphony Orchestra, conducted by Nils


Lehman. 1 side, 12" 33 1/3 rpm, 1952. Classic CE 1011.

Note: The other side contains Dover Beach, Op. 3>


and Three Songs set to Poems from Chamber Music
by James Joyce, Op. 10.

Eastman-Rochester Symphony Orchestra, conducted by


Howard Hanson. 33 1 /3 rpm. Mercury MG 50087.

The New Symphony Orchestra (London), Samuel Barber


conducting. 33 1/3 rpm. London LL 1328.

Three Songs set to Poems from Chamber Music by James


Joyce, Op. 10. Paul King, baritone; Samuel Quincy,
piano. See Symphony N o . 1., Op. 9> above.

"Sleep Now," Op. 10, No. 2.

Marilyn Cotlow, soprano; Claire Stafford, piano. 1


side, 10" 78 rpm, 1949. RCA Victor 10-1467. Also
1 side, 7" 45 rpm, RCA Victor 49-0679.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
347

String Quartet, Op. 11.

Stradivari Record Quartet. 1 side, 12" 33 1/3 rpm,


1951. Stradivari 602.
See Sonata for Violoncello and Piano, Op. 6, above.

Adagio for Strings, Op. 11

NBC Symphony Orchestra, conducted by Arturo Toscanini.


2 sides, 12 78 rpm, 1942. RCA Victor 11-8287.

Note: Issued in England, 1945, as HMV DB-6180.

Boyd Neel Orchestra, conducted by Boyd Neel. 2 sides,


12" 78 rpm, 1950. (English) Decca X-305.

Note: Issued in America in 1950, record entitled


Music of the 20th Century. Also contains "Prayer"
for ceTTo and piano by Ernest Bloch and "Pour Piano
Blues" by Aaron Copland. 10" 33 1/3 rpm. London
LPS 298. See also Overture to The School for Scandal,
Op. above.

Essay for Orchestra, Op. 12.

Philadelphia Orchestra, conducted^by Eugene Ormandy.


2 sides, 12" 78 rpm, 1941. RCA Victor 18062. See
Overture to Tne School for Scandal, Op. 5, above.

Concerto for Violin and Orchestra, O p . 14.

Louis Kaufman, violin. Winterthur Orchestra, con-,


ducted by Walter Goehr. 2 sides, 12" 33 1/3 rpm
(1951, for subscribers only). Concert Hall E 8.

Berlin Radio Symphony Orchestra, soloist and con


ductor are given fictitious names (Hans Girdach,
violin, Helmut Schultz, conductor).' 2 sides, 10"
33 1/3 rpm. Regent MG 5024.

Symphony N o . 2, Op. 19.

New Symphony Orchestra, conducted by Samuel Barber.


2 sides, 10" 33 1/3 rpm, 1951. London 334.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
348

Excursions, Op. 20.

Rudolf Firkusny, piano. 1 side, 33 1/3 rpm. See


Knoxville; Summer of 1913, Op. 24, below.

______ : No. 4 (Allegro molto) only.

Andor Foldes, piano. 1 side, 10" 78 rpm, 1947.


Vox 174.

Note: The album, which contains four records, is


entitled Contemporary American Piano Music. It also
contains compositions by Bowles, Copland, Harris,
Piston, Schuman, Sessions, and Thomson.

Capricorn Concerto, Op. 21

Julius 3aker, flute; Mitchell Miller, oboe; Harry


Freistadt, trumpet; Saidenberg Little Symphony,
conducted by Daniel Saidenberg. 4 sides, 2 12"
78 rpm, with album (1947, for subscribers only).
Concert Hall A 4. Also 1 side, 12" 33 1/3 rpm,
1951 CHS 1078. Schuman1s Symphony for Strings
is on the other side.

Concerto for Violoncello and Orchestra, Op. 22.

Zara Nelsova, 'cello; New Symphony Orchestra, con


ducted by Samuel Barber. 2 sides, 10" 33 1/3 rpm,
1951. London LPS 332.

Suite from the Ballet Medea, Op. 23.

New Symphony Orchestra, conducted by Samuel Barber.


2 sides, 10" 33 1/3 rpm, 1951. London LPS 333.

Knoxville: Summer of 1915, Op. 24.

Eleanor Steber, soprano; Dumbarton Oaks Chamber


Orchestra, conducted by William Strickland. 1 side,
10" 33 1/3 rpm, 1951. Columbia ML 2174.

Note: The other side contains Excursions, Op. 20,


played by Rudolf Firkusny.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
349

Sonata for Piano, Op. 26.

Vladimir Horowitz, piano. 1 side, 12" 33 1/3 rpm,


1950. RCA Victor LM 1113. Also 4 sides, 2 12" 78
rpm, with album, RCA Victor DM 1466.

Hermit Songs, Op. 29.

Leontyne Price, soprano; Samuel Barber, piano.


1 side, 12" 33 1/3 rpm. Columbia ML 4988.

Note: The other side contains String Quartet No. 1


by Alexes Haieff.

Commando March

Eastman Symphonic Wind Ensemble, conducted by


Frederick Fennell. 1/3 side, 12" 33 1/3 rpm, 1953.
Mercury 40006.

Note: This record is entitled American Concert Band


Masterpieces. It also contains works by Persiche'tti,
Gould, Schuman, Bennett, and Piston.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
350

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Books

Agee, James. Penult Me Voyage. New Haven: Yale University


Press, 1950.

Allen, P. S. The Romanesque Lyric. Chapel Hill: University


of North Carolina Press, 192b.

American Composers Today, ed. by David Ewen. New York: H.


W. Wilson Co., 1949.

Arnold, Matthew. Poems. New York: The Macmillan Co., 1940.

ASCAP Biographical Dictionary of Composers, Authors, and


Publishers, 2nd ed., ed. By Daniel I. McNamara. New
York: Thomas Y. Crowell Co., 1952.

Baker1s Biographical Dictionary of Musicians, 4th ed. New


York: G. Schirmer, Inc., l^TO.

Blesh, Rudi. Shining Trumpets. New York: Alfred A. Knopf,


1946.---- ------ --------

Broder, Nathan. Samuel Barber. New York: G. Schirmer,


Inc., 1954.

Brooks, Cleanth, and Robert Penn Warren. Understanding


Poetry. New York: Henry Holt Co., 1933"!

Butler, Eliza Marian. Rainer Maria Rilke. New York: The


Macmillan Co., 1941.

Celtic Miscellany, A, translated by Kenneth Hurlstone


Jackson. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press,
1951.
Davie, Cedric Thorpe. Musical Structure and Design.
London: Dennis Dobson, 1943.

Demuth, Norman. Musical Trends in the 20th Century.


London: Rockliff Publishing Co., 1952.

Dickinson, Emily. The Complete Poems of Emily Dickinson.


Boston: Little, Brown 8s Co., 192ZTT

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
351

Dwight, Timothy, et al. The World's Great Classics. New


York: The CoTonTal Press, lb99.

Encyclopedia of the Great Composers and Their Music, ed. by


Milton Cross and David Ewen. New York:' Doubleday and
Co., 1953.

Eschman, Karl. Changing Forms in Modern Music. Boston:


E. C. Schirmer Music Co., 1^517

Four Famous Greek Plays, introduced by Paul Landis. New


York: The Modern Library, 1929.

Gianville-Hicks, Peggy. "Samuel Barber," in Grove1s


Dictionary of Music and Musicians, 5th ed., 9 vols.,
ed. by EricTilom. London: The Macmillan Co., 1954,
II, 425-426.

Hindemith, Paul. A Composer's World. Cambridge, Mass.:


Harvard University Press, 19$2.

International Cyclopedia of Music and Musicians, The, 4th


ed., ed. by Nicolas STonimsky. New York: Dodd, Mead
Co., 1946.

Joyce, James. The Portable James Joyce, ed. by Harry Levin.


New York: ~The Viking Press, 1947.

Krenek, Ernst. Music Here and Now. New York: W. W. Norton


Co., 1939.

Lenormand, Rene. Study of M o d e m Harmony. Boston: Boston


Music Co., I9I 5 .

McHose, Allen Irvine. The Contrapuntal Harmonic Technique


of the 18 th Century. New York: F. S. Crofts 8s
Company, 19477

Miller, Horace Alden. New Harmonic Devices. New York:


Oliver Ditson, 1930.

O'Faolain, Sean. The Silver Branch. London: Alden Press,


1938.

Poems of Gerard Manley Hopkins, 2nd ed., ed. by Robert


Bridges. London: Oxford University Press, 1931. ;

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
352

Portraits of the World1s Best Known Musicians, by Guy McCoy.


Philadelphia! Theodore Presser Co!, 1946.

Prokosch, Frederic. Chosen Poems. New York: Doubleday &


Co., 1947.

Read, Gardner. Thesaurus of Orchestral Devices. New York:


Pitman Publishing Corporation, 1953.

Rees^, Gustave. Music in the Renaissance. New York: W. W.


Norton Co., 1954.

Reis, Claire R. Composers in America, 2nd ed. New York:


The Macmillan Co., 1947!"

Sargeant, Winthrop. Jazz: Hot and Hybrid. New'York: E. P.


Dutton & Co., 1946.

Slonimsky, Nicholas. Music Since 1900. New York: W. W.


Norton Co., 1937.

Spender, Stephen. Collected Poems. New York: Random


House, 1955-

Stephens, James. Reincarnations. London: The Macmillan


Co., 1948.

Collected Poems. New York: The Macmillan Co.,


T926!-------------
Tovey, Donald Francis. Bssays in Musical Analysis. London:
Oxford University Press, l9'3o.

20th Century Music, ed. by David Ewen. New York: Prentice


Hall, .Inc., 1952.

Ulanov, Barry. A History of Jazz. New York: The Viking


Press, 1952.

Villa, Jose' Garcia. Have Come Am Here. New York: The


Viking Press, 1942,

Vincent, John. The Diatonic Modes in Modern Music. New


York: Mills Music, Inc., 1951.

Waddell, Helen. Mediaeval Latin Lyrics. New York:


Richard R. Smith, Inc., 1930.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
353

Who is Who in Music, 5th ed. Chicago: Sterling Publishing


Co., 1951.

Yeats, W. B. The Collected Poems of W. B. Yeats. New York:


The Macmillan Co., 1'951.

Periodicals

"American Music in Oaklahoma," The Musician 43 (August 1938),


143.

Broder, Nathan, "The Music of Samuel Barber," The Musical


Quarterly XXXIV (July 1948), 325-335.

'Cowell, Henry, "Current Chronicle," The Musical Quarterly


XXXVIII (July 1952), 435-437.

Dexter, Harry, "Samuel Barber and His Music," Musical


Opinion 72 (March 1949)* 285-2 86.

, "Samuel Barber and His Music," Musical Opinion 72


('April 1949), 343-344.

Elliot, J. H., "Samuel Barber's First Symphony," Halle'.


A Magazine for the Music Lover (November 13, 1954).

Ford, Dorothy, "American Profile," Australian Musical News


and Digest XXXVIII (July 1947 )7TT:

Grater, Manfred, "Der Sanger von Capricorn," Zeitschrift


Fur Neue Musik (September 1954), 247-251.

Haber, Julius, "News Information - Adagio for Strings,"


R.C.A. Manufacturing Co., Inc.

Hofmann, Josef, "More American Music," Musical Events


(April 1938), 77-78. :

Horan, Robert, "American Composers, Samuel Barber,"


Modern Music XX (March-April 1943), 161-1 6 5 .

, "American Composers, Samuel Barber," M o d e m Music


SC (April 1948), 1 69. ------------

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
354

La Grange, Henri-Louis, de, "D'Amerique, Un Compositeur


Americain Independant: Samuel Barber, "Contrepoints,
No. 4 (Mai-Juin 1940), 63-67.

McIntyre, Kerverell, "Barbers Symphony No. 1 - Opus 9,"


The Canon 2 (May 1949), 3 51 .

Mills, Charles, "Over the Air," Modern Music XXII (March-


April 1945), 209.

Oliver Edel, "Sonatas for Cello & Piano," Repertoire I


(October 1951), 50-51.

"Prix de Rome Winner Prepared for Work as Composer with


Wide Musical Curriculum." Musical Events (December
1935).

Quillian, James W., "The Songs of Samuel Barber,"


Repertoire I (October 1951), 17-21.

Rawlinson, Harold, "Famous Works for String Orchestra,"


The Strad LX (April 1950) Astor Lenox, Tilton
Foundation'.

Smith, William E., "Samuel Barbers Music Given at Special


Concert," Musical America (March 1937), 34.

Tischler, Hans, "Barber's Piano Sonata, Opus No. 26,"


Music and Letters XXXIII (October 1952), 352-354.

Newspapers

Detroit Free Press, February 26, 1956.

New York Herald Tribune:'*'


MarcfT247"l335T----
December 14, 1936.
March 26, 1937.

1. The writer is indebted to Rutherford D. Rogers, Chief


of the Reference Department of the New York Public
Library, for supplying microfilm copies of clippings
taken from the New York Herald Tribune.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
355

May 2, 1937.
April 17, 19*12.
September 4, 1942.
March 10, 1944.
October 12, 194.5.
June 28, 1946.
November 30, 1947.
April 5,-1948,
January 5, 1950.

The New York Sun, March 20, 1937.

New York Times:


~5pril 12, 1933.
May 10, 1935.
June 26, 1935.
December 14, 1936.
March 21, 1937.
March 25, 1937.
March 26, 1937-
May 2, 1937.
October 27, 1938.
November 6 , 1938.
November 13, 1938.
November 20, 1938.
November 27, 1938;
December 25, 1938.
April 16, 1939.
December 29, 1939*
January 21, 1940.
August 10, 1941.
July 26, 1943.
March 4, 1944.
March 10, 1944.
April 7, 1946.
June 28, 1946.
December 29, 1946.
February 23. 1947.
September 24, 1947.
November 30, 1947.
December 15, 1949.
December 12, 1954.
- December 9, 1954.

2. Ibid., The New York Sun.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
356

Program Notes

Burk, John, program annotator, Boston Symphony Orchestra,


Eighteenth Program, 1943-1944.

Boston Symphony Orchestra. Carnegie Hall Program,


March, 1944.

______ . Carnegie Hall Program, February, 1945.

New York Philharmonic Society Program. Summer Concerts


Orchestra, Robin Hood Dell, Fairmont Park,
Philadelphia, August 20, 1933.

Smith, George Henry Lovett, program annotator, Cleveland


Orchestra, 1943-1944.

Town Hall Recital, "Melodies passageres," Pilrre Bemac,


baritone, Francis Poulenc, pianist, February 10, 1952.

_, "Reincarnations," The Hufstader Singers,


December 16, 1951-

Letters

Barber, Samuel, letter to writer, dated March 28, 1955.

Batson, Florence L., Permission Department of the Macmillan


Company, letter to writer, dated November 11, 1955.

Briggs, Grace A., for the Harvard University Press, letter


to writer, dated November 28, 1955*

Bujalski, Ann S., Permissions Department of Yale University


Press, letter to writer, dated November 15, 1955.

Cumberlege, Geoffrey, for the Oxford University Press,


letter to writer, dated November 16, 1955-

Frankenstein, Alfred, San Franciso Chronicle, letter to


writer, dated January 9, 1956.

Heinshelmer, H. W., G. Schirmer, Inc., Music Publishers,


letter to writer, dated September 21, 1955.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Rogers, Rutherford D . , Chief of Reference Department,
The New York Public Library, letter to writer,
dated December 1, 1955*

Shereff, Dorothy L., for The Viking Press, letter to


writer, dated November 11, 1955.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.

You might also like